Part Number Hot Search : 
ST23YR 01547 50N04 EM48A HMC322 74HC158 C0603X LB1881V
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP86FH12MG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/C Series
TMP86FH12MG
TMP86FH12MG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023 _ D TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A The Toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These Toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of Toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C The products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_F For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
(c) 2006 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All Rights Reserved
Page 2
Revision History
Date 2005/10/26 2006/4/21 2006/6/29 2006/10/17 Revision 1 2 3 4 First Release Contents Revised Periodical updating.No change in contents. Contents Revised
Table of Contents
TMP86FH12MG
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 4 5
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 7 Program Memory (Flash) .......................................................................................................................... 7 Data Memory (RAM) ................................................................................................................................. 8 Clock Generator........................................................................................................................................ 8 Timing Generator .................................................................................................................................... 10 Operation Mode Control Circuit .............................................................................................................. 11
Single-clock mode Dual-clock mode STOP mode Configuration of timing generator Machine cycle
2.2
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3
System Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 2.2.4.4
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control ......................................................................................................................... 16
STOP mode IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0) SLOW mode
2.3
Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
External Reset Input ............................................................................................................................... 29 Address trap reset .................................................................................................................................. 30 Watchdog timer reset.............................................................................................................................. 30 System clock reset.................................................................................................................................. 30
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 3.2 Interrupt latches (IL28 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 34 Individual interrupt enable flags (EF28 to EF4) ...................................................................................... 35
Note 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3.3 Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4.1 3.4.2 Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 37 Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 38 Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 39
Using PUSH and POP instructions Using data transfer instructions 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.2
3.2.1 3.2.2
3.4
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 40 Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 40
i
3.5 3.6 3.7
Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 4.2 SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5. I/O Ports
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Port P0 (P07 to P00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P1 (P17 to P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P2 (P22 to P20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P3 (P37 to 30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 53 55 56
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.1 6.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ................................................................... Watchdog Timer Enable ......................................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................ Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)...................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Reset ........................................................................................................................... Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS) ................................................................................ Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT) .................................................................................. Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)....................................................................................................... Address Trap Reset ................................................................................................................................ 60 61 62 62 63
6.3
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5
Address Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
64 64 64 65
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 67 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 67 Function .................................................................................................................................................. 68 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 69 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 69 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2.1 7.2.2
7.2
Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8. Real-Time Clock
8.1 8.2 8.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Control of the RTC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ii
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Control and Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable pulse generator output (PPG output) ............................................................................. 78
50% duty mode Variable duty mode PPG1/PPG2 independent mode 9.4.1.1 9.4.1.2 9.4.1.3 9.4.2.1 9.4.2.2 9.4.2.3 9.4.2.4 9.4.2.5 9.4.3.1 9.4.3.2 9.4.3.3 9.4.4.1 9.4.4.2 9.4.5.1 9.4.5.2 9.4.5.3
73 73 77 78
9.4.1
9.4.2
Starting a count....................................................................................................................................... 82
Command start and capture mode Command start and trigger start mode Trigger start mode Trigger capture mode (CSTC = 00) Trigger start/stop acceptance mode
9.4.3
Configuring how the timer stops ............................................................................................................. 89
Counting stopped with the outputs initialized Counting stopped with the outputs maintained Counting stopped with the outputs initialized at the end of the period One-time output mode Continuous output mode
9.4.4 9.4.5
One-time/continuous output mode.......................................................................................................... 89 PPG output control (Initial value/output logic, enabling/disabling output) ............................................... 91
Specifying initial values and output logic for PPG outputs Enabling or disabling PPG outputs Using the TC7 as a normal timer/counter
9.4.6 9.4.7
Eliminating noise from the TC7 pin input ................................................................................................ 91 Interrupts................................................................................................................................................. 93
INTTC7T (Trigger start interrupt) INTTC7P (Period interrupt) INTEMG (Emergency output stop interrupt)
9.4.8
9.4.7.1 9.4.7.2 9.4.7.3 9.4.8.1 9.4.8.2 9.4.8.3 9.4.8.4 9.4.8.5 9.4.8.6
Emergency PPG output stop feature ...................................................................................................... 94
Enabling/disabling input on the EMG pin Monitoring the emergency PPG output stop state EMG interrupt Canceling the emergency PPG output stop state Restarting the timer after canceling the emergency PPG output stop state Response time between EMG pin input and PPG outputs being initialized
9.4.9
TC7 operation and microcontroller operating mode ............................................................................... 96
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.1 10.2 10.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Timer mode......................................................................................................................................... External Trigger Timer Mode .............................................................................................................. Event Counter Mode ........................................................................................................................... Window Mode ..................................................................................................................................... Pulse Width Measurement Mode........................................................................................................ Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode ......................................................................... 100 102 104 105 106 109
10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
11.1 11.2 11.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................................ 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4) .................................................................................................... 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)................................................................. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4).............................................................. 119 120 120 123
11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4
iii
11.3.5 11.3.6 11.3.7 11.3.8 11.3.9
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) .......................................................................................................... 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................ 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)...................................................... 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4) ........................................... Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
125 126 126 129 131
11.3.9.1 11.3.9.2
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.1 12.2 12.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Serial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Clock source ....................................................................................................................................... 135 Shift edge............................................................................................................................................ 137
Leading edge Trailing edge Internal clock External clock 12.3.1.1 12.3.1.2 12.3.2.1 12.3.2.2
12.3.1 12.3.2
12.4 12.5 12.6
Number of bits to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Number of words to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes ............................................................................................................. 138 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes ............................................................................................................. 140 8-bit transfer / receive mode ............................................................................................................... 141
12.6.1 12.6.2 12.6.3
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 148 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 148 149 149 149 150 150 151
143 144 146 147 147 148 148 148
13.8.1 13.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
13.9.1 13.9.2 13.9.3 13.9.4 13.9.5 13.9.6
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.1 14.2 14.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Software Start Mode ........................................................................................................................... 157 Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 157
14.3.1 14.3.2
iv
14.4 14.5 14.6
14.3.3
STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Precautions about AD Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... 161 Analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... 161 Noise Countermeasure ....................................................................................................................... 161
Register Setting ................................................................................................................................ 158
14.6.1 14.6.2 14.6.3
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
15.1 15.2 15.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
16. Flash Memory
16.1 Flash Memory Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Flash Memory Command Sequence Execution Control (FLSCR) ..................................... 166 ............................................................................................................................................................ 166 Flash Memory Standby Control (FLSSTB) ............................................................................ 166 16.1.1 16.1.1 16.1.2
16.2
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Byte Program ...................................................................................................................................... Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase) ............................................................................................................. Chip Erase (All Erase) ........................................................................................................................ Product ID Entry ................................................................................................................................. Product ID Exit .................................................................................................................................... Read Protect ....................................................................................................................................... 168 168 169 169 169 169
16.3 16.4
16.2.1 16.2.2 16.2.3 16.2.4 16.2.5 16.2.6
Toggle Bit (D6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Access to the Flash Memory Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Flash Memory Control in the Serial PROM Mode............................................................................... 171 Flash Memory Control in the MCU mode............................................................................................ 173
How to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the RAM area (in the MCU mode) How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode)
16.4.1 16.4.2
16.4.1.1
16.4.2.1
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.1 17.2 17.3 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Memory Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Serial PROM Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Serial PROM Mode Control Pins ........................................................................................................ Pin Function........................................................................................................................................ Example Connection for On-Board Writing......................................................................................... Activating the Serial PROM Mode ...................................................................................................... 176 176 177 178
17.4 17.5 17.6
17.3.1 17.3.2 17.3.3 17.3.4
Interface Specifications for UART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Operation Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Operation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Flash Memory Erasing Mode (Operating command: F0H) ................................................................. Flash Memory Writing Mode (Operation command: 30H) .................................................................. RAM Loader Mode (Operation Command: 60H) ................................................................................ Flash Memory SUM Output Mode (Operation Command: 90H) ......................................................... Product ID Code Output Mode (Operation Command: C0H).............................................................. Flash Memory Status Output Mode (Operation Command: C3H) ...................................................... Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode (Operation Command: FAH) ...................................... 183 185 188 190 191 193 194
17.7
17.6.1 17.6.2 17.6.3 17.6.4 17.6.5 17.6.6 17.6.7
Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
v
17.8
Checksum (SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Calculation Method ............................................................................................................................. 196 Calculation data .................................................................................................................................. 197
17.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 17.10 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
17.10.1 17.10.2 17.10.3 Password String................................................................................................................................ 199 Handling of Password Error .............................................................................................................. 199 Password Management during Program Development .................................................................... 199
17.8.1 17.8.2
17.11 17.12 17.13 17.14 17.15 17.16
Product ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash Memory Status Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Erasure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Input Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UART Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200 200 202 202 204 205
18. Input/Output Circuit
18.1 18.2 Control pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.1 19.2 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Recommended Operating Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
MCU Mode (Flash memory writing and erasing) ................................................................................ 209 MCU Mode (Except flash memory writing and erasing)...................................................................... 210 Serial PROM Mode ............................................................................................................................. 210
19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 19.8
19.2.1 19.2.2 19.2.3
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD Conversion Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Oscillating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211 212 212 213 214 214
20. Package Dimension
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
vi
TMP86FH12MG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP86FH12MG
The TMP86FH12MG is a single-chip 8-bit high-speed and high-functionality microcomputer incorporating 16384 bytes of Flash Memory. It is pin-compatible with the TMP86CH12MG (Mask ROM version). The TMP86FH12MG can realize operations equivalent to those of the TMP86CH12MG by programming the on-chip Flash Memory.
Product No. TMP86FH12MG ROM (FLASH) 16384 bytes RAM 512 bytes Package P-SSOP30-56-0.65 MASK ROM MCU TMP86CH12MG Emulation Chip TMP86C912XB
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/C series - Instruction execution time : 0.25 s (at 16 MHz) 122 s (at 32.768 kHz) - 132 types & 731 basic instructions 2. 22interrupt sources (External : 6 Internal : 16) 3. Input / Output ports (24 pins) Large current output: 8pins (Typ. 20mA), LED direct drive 4. Watchdog Timer 5. Prescaler - Time base timer - Divider output function 6. 10-bit timer counter: 1ch (2 output pins) 2ports output PPG (Programmed Pulse Generator) 50%duty output mode Variable Duty output mode External-triggered start and stop
This product uses the Super Flash technology under the licence of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. Super Flash is registered trademark of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc.
060116EBP
* The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D * TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A * The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunctionor failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B * The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q * The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C * The products described in this document are subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_E * For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP86FH12MG
Emargency stop pin 7. 16-bit timer counter: 1 ch - Timer, External trigger, Window, Pulse width measurement, Event counter, Programmable pulse generate (PPG) modes 8. 8-bit timer counter : 2 ch - Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO), Pulse width modulation (PWM) output, Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes 9. 8-bit SIO: 1 ch 10. 8-bit UART : 1 ch 11. 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter - Analog input: 8 ch 12. Key-on wakeup : 4 ch 13. Clock operation Single clock mode Dual clock mode 14. Low power consumption operation STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.) SLOW1 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock stop.) SLOW2 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock oscillate.) IDLE0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. IDLE1 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs(CPU restarts). IDLE2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. Release by interruputs. (CPU restarts). SLEEP0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using low frequency clock.Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. SLEEP1 mode: CPU stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. Release by interruput.(CPU restarts). SLEEP2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. interruput. 15. Wide operation voltage:
2.7 V to 5.5 V at 8MHz /32.768 kHz 4.5 V to 5.5 V at 16 MHz /32.768 kHz
Release by
Page 2
TMP86FH12MG
1.2 Pin Assignment
VSS XIN XOUT TEST VDD (XTIN) P21 (XTOUT) P22
RESET
(INT5/STOP) P20 (TC1/INT4) P14 (TXD) P00 (BOOT/RXD) P01 (SCK) P02 (SI) P03 (SO) P04
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
30 P37 (AIN7) 29 P36 (AIN6/STOP3) 28 P35 (AIN5/STOP2) 27 P34 (AIN4/STOP1) 26 P33 (AIN3/STOP0) 25 P32 (AIN2) 24 P31 (AIN1/INT0) 23 P30 (AIN0/EMG) 22 P13 (PPG/INT3) 21 P12 (DVO) 20 P11 (TC4/PDO4/PWM4/PPG4) 19 P10 (TC3/PDO3/PWM3) 18 P07 (PPG2/INT2) 17 P06 (PPG1/INT1) 16 P05 (TC7)
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
Page 3
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP86FH12MG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP86FH12MG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
The TMP86FH12MG has MCU mode, parallel PROM mode, and serial PROM mode. Table 1-1 shows the pin functions in MCU mode. The serial PROM mode is explained later in a separate chapter. Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/2)
Pin Name P07 PPG2 INT2 P06 PPG1 INT1 P05 TC7 P04 SO P03 SI P02
SCK
Pin Number
Input/Output IO O I IO O I IO I IO O IO I IO IO IO I I IO O IO I I IO O I IO O IO I O IO I O IO O
Functions PORT07 Timer counter 7 PPG2 output External interrupt 2 input PORT06 Timer counter 7 PPG1 output External interrupt 1 input PORT05 Timer counter 7 input PORT04 Serial Data Output PORT03 Serial Data Input PORT02 Serial Clock I/O PORT01 UART data input Serial PROM mode control input PORT00 UART data output PORT14 External interrupt 4 input TC1 input PORT13 PPG output External interrupt 3 input PORT12 Divider Output PORT11 TC4 input PDO4/PWM4/PPG4 output PORT10 TC3 input PDO3/PWM3 output PORT22 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT21 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT20 STOP mode release signal input External interrupt 5 input PORT37 Analog Input7
18
17
16
15
14
13
P01 RXD BOOT P00 TXD P14 INT4 TC1 P13
PPG
12
11
10
22
INT3 P12
DVO
21
P11 TC4
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4
20
P10 TC3
PDO3/PWM3
19
P22 XTOUT
7
P21 XTIN P20
STOP INT5
6
IO I IO I I IO I
9
P37 AIN7
30
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86FH12MG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/2)
Pin Name P36 AIN6 STOP3 P35 AIN5 STOP2 P34 AIN4 STOP1 P33 AIN3 STOP0 P32 AIN2 P31 AIN1
INT0
Pin Number
Input/Output IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I IO I I IO I I I O I I I I PORT36 Analog Input6 STOP3 input PORT35 Analog Input5 STOP2 input PORT34 Analog Input4 STOP1 input PORT33 Analog Input3 STOP0 input PORT32 Analog Input2 PORT31 Analog Input1 External interrupt 0 input
Functions
29
28
27
26
25
24
P30 AIN0
EMG
23
PORT30 Analog Input0 Timer counter 7 Emergency stop input Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Reset signal Test pin for out-going test. Normally, be fixed to low. +5V 0(GND)
XIN XOUT
RESET
2 3 8 4 5 1
TEST VDD VSS
Page 6
TMP86FH12MG
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions
The CPU core consists of a CPU, a system clock controller, and an interrupt controller. This section provides a description of the CPU core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The TMP86FH12MG memory is composed Flash, RAM, DBR(Data buffer register) and SFR(Special function register). They are all mapped in 64-Kbyte address space. Figure 2-1 shows the TMP86FH12MG memory address map.
0000H
SFR
003FH 0040H
64 bytes
SFR:
RAM
023FH 0F80H
512 bytes
RAM:
Special function register includes: I/O ports Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers System control registers Program status word Random access memory includes: Data memory Stack
DBR:
DBR
0FFFH C000H
128 bytes
Data buffer register includes: Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers
Flash:
Program memory
Flash
FFA0H FFBFH FFC0H FFDFH FFE0H FFFFH
16384 bytes
Vector table for interrupts (32 bytes) Vector table for vector call instructions (32 bytes) Vector table for interrupts (32 bytes)
Figure 2-1 Memory Address Map 2.1.2 Program Memory (Flash)
The TMP86FH12MG has a 16384 bytes (Address C000H to FFFFH) of program memory (Flash ).
Page 7
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP86FH12MG has 512bytes (Address 0040H to 023FH) of internal RAM. The first 192 bytes (0040H to 00FFH) of the internal RAM are located in the direct area; instructions with shorten operations are available against such an area. The data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory should be initialized by an initialization routine.
Example :Clears RAM to "00H". (TMP86FH12MG)
LD LD LD SRAMCLR: LD INC DEC JRS HL, 0040H A, H BC, 01FFH (HL), A HL BC F, SRAMCLR ; Start address setup ; Initial value (00H) setup
2.2 System Clock Controller
The system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller.
Timing generator control register Clock generator
XIN fc TBTCR 0036H
High-frequency clock oscillator
XOUT XTIN
Timing generator
fs
Standby controller
0038H SYSCR1 0039H SYSCR2
Low-frequency clock oscillator
XTOUT
System clocks Clock generator control
System control registers
Figure 2-2 System Colck Control 2.2.1 Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the basic clock which provides the system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware. It contains two oscillation circuits: One for the high-frequency clock and one for the low-frequency clock. Power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power operation based on the low-frequency clock. The high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator between the XIN/XOUT and XTIN/XTOUT pins respectively. Clock input from an external oscillator is also possible. In this case, external clock is applied to XIN/XTIN pin with XOUT/XTOUT pin not connected.
Page 8
TMP86FH12MG
High-frequency clock XIN XOUT XIN XOUT (Open) XTIN
Low-frequency clock XTOUT XTIN XTOUT (Open)
(a) Crystal/Ceramic resonator
(b) External oscillator
(c) Crystal
(d) External oscillator
Figure 2-3 Examples of Resonator Connection
Note:The function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with disabling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program. The system to require the adjustment of the oscillation frequency should create the program for the adjustment in advance.
Page 9
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
2.2.2
Timing Generator
The timing generator generates the various system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware from the basic clock (fc or fs). The timing generator provides the following functions. 1. Generation of main system clock 2. Generation of divider output (DVO) pulses 3. Generation of source clocks for time base timer 4. Generation of source clocks for watchdog timer 5. Generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters 6. Generation of warm-up clocks for releasing STOP mode
2.2.2.1
Configuration of timing generator
The timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator, and machine cycle counters. An input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, SYSCR2 and TBTCR, that is shown in Figure 2-4. As reset and STOP mode started/canceled, the prescaler and the divider are cleared to "0".
fc or fs
Main system clock generator
SYSCK DV7CK
Machine cycle counters
High-frequency clock fc Low-frequency clock fs
12
fc/4
S A 123456 B Y
Divider
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 S B0 B1 A0 Y0 A1 Y1
Multiplexer
Multiplexer
Warm-up controller
Watchdog timer
Timer counter, Serial interface, Time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (Peripheral functions)
Figure 2-4 Configuration of Timing Generator
Page 10
TMP86FH12MG
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR (0036H) 7 (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 DV7CK 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DV7CK
Selection of input to the 7th stage of the divider
0: fc/28 [Hz] 1: fs
R/W
Note 1: In single clock mode, do not set DV7CK to "1". Note 2: Do not set "1" on DV7CK while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 4: In SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the DV7CK setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider. Note 5: When STOP mode is entered from NORMAL1/2 mode, the DV7CK setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after release of STOP mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period.
2.2.2.2
Machine cycle
Instruction execution and peripheral hardware operation are synchronized with the main system clock. The minimum instruction execution unit is called an "machine cycle". There are a total of 10 different types of instructions for the TLCS-870/C Series: Ranging from 1-cycle instructions which require one machine cycle for execution to 10-cycle instructions which require 10 machine cycles for execution. A machine cycle consists of 4 states (S0 to S3), and each state consists of one main system clock.
1/fc or 1/fs [s]
Main system clock
State
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycle 2.2.3 Operation Mode Control Circuit
The operation mode control circuit starts and stops the oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. There are three operating modes: Single clock mode, dual clock mode and STOP mode. These modes are controlled by the system control registers (SYSCR1 and SYSCR2). Figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram.
2.2.3.1
Single-clock mode
Only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequency clock is used, and P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins are used as input/output ports. The main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. In the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s]. (1) NORMAL1 mode In this mode, both the CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock. The TMP86FH12MG is placed in this mode after reset.
Page 11
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
(2)
IDLE1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock). IDLE1 mode is started by SYSCR2 = "1", and IDLE1 mode is released to NORMAL1 mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peripherals or external interrupt inputs. When the IMF (Interrupt master enable flag) is "1" (Interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance of the interrupt, and the operation will return to normal after the interrupt service is completed. When the IMF is "0" (Interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the IDLE1 mode start instruction.
(3)
IDLE0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by SYSCR2 = "1". When IDLE0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from IDLE0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering NORMAL1 mode back again. IDLE0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF1 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When IDLE0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to NORMAL1 mode.
2.2.3.2
Dual-clock mode
Both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillation circuits are used in this mode. P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. The main system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock in NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in SLOW and SLEEP modes. The machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and 4/fs [s] (122 s at fs = 32.768 kHz) in the SLOW and SLEEP modes. The TLCS-870/C is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. To use the dual-clock mode, the lowfrequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program. (1) NORMAL2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the high-frequency clock. On-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock. (2) SLOW2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the low-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. As the SYSCR2 becomes "1", the hardware changes into SLOW2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into NORMAL2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into SLOW1 mode. Do not clear SYSCR2 to "0" during SLOW2 mode. (3) SLOW1 mode This mode can be used to reduce power-consumption by turning off oscillation of the high-frequency clock. The CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the low-frequency clock.
Page 12
TMP86FH12MG
Switching back and forth between SLOW1 and SLOW2 modes are performed by SYSCR2. In SLOW1 and SLEEP modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (4) IDLE2 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock and/or the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of IDLE2 mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to NORMAL2 mode. (5) SLEEP1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. The CPU, the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of SLEEP mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to SLOW1 mode. In SLOW1 and SLEEP1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (6) SLEEP2 mode The SLEEP2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the SLOW2 mode. The status under the SLEEP2 mode is same as that under the SLEEP1 mode, except for the oscillation circuit of the highfrequency clock. (7) SLEEP0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by setting "1" on bit SYSCR2. When SLEEP0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from SLEEP0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering SLOW1 mode back again. SLEEP0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF1 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When SLEEP0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to SLOW1 mode.
2.2.3.3
STOP mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. The internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during STOP mode. STOP mode is started by the system control register 1 (SYSCR1), and STOP mode is released by a inputting (Either level-sensitive or edge-sensitive can be programmably selected) to the STOP pin. After the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the STOP mode start instruction.
Page 13
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
IDLE0 mode
Reset release
RESET
IDLE1 mode (a) Single-clock mode
Note 2 SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" NORMAL1 mode Interrupt STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "0" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" STOP SYSCR2 = "1" SLOW2 mode Interrupt SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "0" SLOW1 mode SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" SLEEP0 mode
IDLE2 mode
Interrupt
NORMAL2 mode
SYSCR2 = "0" SLEEP2 mode
SLEEP1 mode (b) Dual-clock mode
SYSCR2 = "1" Interrupt Note 2
Note 1: NORMAL1 and NORMAL2 modes are generically called NORMAL; SLOW1 and SLOW2 are called SLOW; IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 are called IDLE; SLEEP0, SLEEP1 and SLEEP2 are called SLEEP. Note 2: The mode is released by falling edge of TBTCR setting.
Figure 2-6 Operating Mode Transition Diagram
Table 2-1 Operating Mode and Conditions
Oscillator Operating Mode High Frequency Low Frequency CPU Core TBT Other Peripherals Reset Operate 4/fc [s] Machine Cycle Time
RESET NORMAL1 Single clock IDLE1 IDLE0 STOP NORMAL2 IDLE2 SLOW2 Dual clock SLEEP2 SLOW1 SLEEP1 SLEEP0 STOP Stop Stop Oscillation Stop Oscillation
Reset Operate Stop Halt
Reset
Operate
Halt Operate with high frequency
Halt
-
4/fc [s]
Oscillation
Halt Operate with low frequency Halt Operate with low frequency Operate
Operate
4/fs [s]
Halt Halt
Halt
-
Page 14
TMP86FH12MG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1 (0038H) 7 STOP 6 RELM 5 RETM 4 OUTEN 3 WUT 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 00**)
STOP RELM RETM OUTEN
STOP mode start Release method for STOP mode Operating mode after STOP mode Port output during STOP mode
0: CPU core and peripherals remain active 1: CPU core and peripherals are halted (Start STOP mode) 0: Edge-sensitive release 1: Level-sensitive release 0: Return to NORMAL1/2 mode 1: Return to SLOW1 mode 0: High impedance 1: Output kept Return to NORMAL mode Return to SLOW mode 3 x 213/fs 213/fs 3 x 26/fs 26/fs
R/W R/W R/W R/W
WUT
Warm-up time at releasing STOP mode
00 01 10 11
3 x 216/fc 216/fc 3 x 214/fc 214/fc
R/W
Note 1: Always set RETM to "0" when transiting from NORMAL mode to STOP mode. Always set RETM to "1" when transiting from SLOW mode to STOP mode. Note 2: When STOP mode is released with RESET pin input, a return is made to NORMAL1 regardless of the RETM contents. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care Note 4: Bits 1 and 0 in SYSCR1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed. Note 5: As the hardware becomes STOP mode under OUTEN = "0", input value is fixed to "0"; therefore it may cause external interrupt request on account of falling edge. Note 6: When the key-on wakeup is used, RELM should be set to "1". Note 7: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode. Note 8: The warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator.
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2 (0039H) 7 XEN 6 XTEN 5 SYSCK 4 IDLE 3 2
TGHALT
1
0 (Initial value: 1000 *0**)
XEN XTEN
High-frequency oscillator control Low-frequency oscillator control Main system clock select (Write)/main system clock monitor (Read) CPU and watchdog timer control (IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) TG control (IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes)
0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL1/NORMAL2/IDLE1/IDLE2) 1: Low-frequency clock (SLOW1/SLOW2/SLEEP1/SLEEP2) 0: CPU and watchdog timer remain active 1: CPU and watchdog timer are stopped (Start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) 0: Feeding clock to all peripherals from TG 1: Stop feeding clock to peripherals except TBT from TG. (Start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes) R/W R/W
SYSCK
IDLE
TGHALT
Note 1: A reset is applied if both XEN and XTEN are cleared to "0", XEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "0", or XTEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "1". Note 2: *: Don't care, TG: Timing generator, *; Don't care Note 3: Bits 3, 1 and 0 in SYSCR2 are always read as undefined value. Note 4: Do not set IDLE and TGHALT to "1" simultaneously. Note 5: Because returning from IDLE0/SLEEP0 to NORMAL1/SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 6: When IDLE1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode is released, IDLE is automatically cleared to "0". Note 7: When IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released, TGHALT is automatically cleared to "0". Note 8: Before setting TGHALT to "1", be sure to stop peripherals. If peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of peripherals may be set after IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released.
Page 15
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control
STOP mode
STOP mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the STOP pin input and key-on wakeup input (STOP3 to STOP0) which is controlled by the STOP mode release control register (STOPCR). The STOP pin is also used both as a port P20 and an INT5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. STOP mode is started by setting SYSCR1 to "1". During STOP mode, the following status is maintained. 1. Oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted. 2. The data memory, registers, the program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before STOP mode was entered. 3. The prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". 4. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction (e.g., [SET (SYSCR1).7]) which started STOP mode. STOP mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be selected with the SYSCR1. Do not use any key-on wakeup input (STOP3 to STOP0) for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive mode.
2.2.4.1
Note 1: The STOP mode can be released by either the STOP or key-on wakeup pin (STOP3 to STOP0). However, because the STOP pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release input, the STOP pin must be used for releasing STOP mode. Note 2: During STOP period (from start of STOP mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to "1" and interrupts may be accepted immediately after STOP mode is released. Before starting STOP mode, therefore, disable interrupts. Also, before enabling interrupts after STOP mode is released, clear unnecessary interrupt latches.
(1)
Level-sensitive release mode (RELM = "1") In this mode, STOP mode is released by setting the STOP pin high or setting the STOP3 to STOP0 pin input which is enabled by STOPCR. This mode is used for capacitor backup when the main power supply is cut off and long term battery backup. Even if an instruction for starting STOP mode is executed while STOP pin input is high or STOP3
to STOP0 input is low, STOP mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immediately. Thus, to start STOP mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to first confirm that the STOP pin input is low or STOP3 to STOP0 input is high. The following two methods can be used for confirmation. 1. Testing a port. 2. Using an external interrupt input INT5 (INT5 is a falling edge-sensitive input). Example 1 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing a port P20.
LD SSTOPH: TEST JRS DI SET (SYSCR1). 7 (SYSCR1), 01010000B (P2PRD). 0 F, SSTOPH ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode ; Wait until the STOP pin input goes low level
Page 16
TMP86FH12MG
Example 2 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode with an INT5 interrupt.
PINT5: TEST JRS LD DI SET SINT5: RETI (SYSCR1). 7 (P2PRD). 0 F, SINT5 (SYSCR1), 01010000B ; To reject noise, STOP mode does not start if port P20 is at high ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode. ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode
STOP pin XOUT pin NORMAL operation STOP operation Confirm by program that the STOP pin input is low and start STOP mode.
VIH
Warm up
NORMAL operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware. Always released if the STOP pin input is high.
Figure 2-7 Level-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: Even if the STOP pin input is low after warm-up start, the STOP mode is not restarted. Note 2: In this case of changing to the level-sensitive mode from the edge-sensitive mode, the release mode is not switched until a rising edge of the STOP pin input is detected.
(2)
Edge-sensitive release mode (RELM = "0") In this mode, STOP mode is released by a rising edge of the STOP pin input. This is used in applications where a relatively short program is executed repeatedly at periodic intervals. This periodic signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the STOP pin. In the edge-sensitive release mode, STOP mode is started even when the STOP pin input is high level. Do not use any STOP3 to STOP0 pin input for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive release mode.
Example :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode
DI LD (SYSCR1), 10010000B ; IMF 0 ; Starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode
STOP pin XOUT pin
NORMAL operation STOP mode started by the program. STOP operation
VIH
Warm up NORMAL operation
STOP operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware at the rising edge of STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Edge-sensitive Release Mode
Page 17
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
STOP mode is released by the following sequence. 1. In the dual-clock mode, when returning to NORMAL2, both the high-frequency and lowfrequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to SLOW1 mode, only the lowfrequency clock oscillator is turned on. In the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency clock oscillator is turned on. 2. A warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. During warm up, all internal operations remain halted. Four different warm-up times can be selected with the SYSCR1 in accordance with the resonator characteristics. 3. When the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction.
Note 1: When the STOP mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". Note 2: STOP mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin, which immediately performs the normal reset operation. Note 3: When STOP mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed. The power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing STOP mode. The RESET pin input must also be "H" level, rising together with the power supply voltage. In this case, if an external time constant circuit has been connected, the RESET pin input voltage will increase at a slower pace than the power supply voltage. At this time, there is a danger that a reset may occur if input voltage level of the RESET pin drops below the non-inverting high-level input voltage (Hysteresis input).
Table 2-2 Warm-up Time Example (at fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Warm-up Time [ms] WUT Return to NORMAL Mode 00 01 10 11 12.288 4.096 3.072 1.024 Return to SLOW Mode 750 250 5.85 1.95
Note 1: The warm-up time is obtained by dividing the basic clock by the divider. Therefore, the warm-up time may include a certain amount of error if there is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency when STOP mode is released. Thus, the warm-up time must be considered as an approximate value.
Page 18
Turn off
Oscillator circuit
Turn on
Main system clock a+3 SET (SYSCR1). 7 n+1 (a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a) n+2 n+3 n+4 Halt
Program counter
a+2
Instruction execution
Divider
n
0
Figure 2-9 STOP Mode Start/Release
a+4
Instruction address a + 2
Page 19
0 1 (b) STOP mode release
Warm up
STOP pin input
Oscillator circuit
Turn off
Turn on
Main system clock a+5
Instruction address a + 3
Program counter
a+3
a+6
Instruction address a + 4
Instruction execution
Halt
Divider
0
Count up
2
3
TMP86FH12MG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
2.2.4.2
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and maskable interrupts. The following status is maintained during these modes. 1. Operation of the CPU and watchdog timer (WDT) is halted. On-chip peripherals continue to operate. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before these modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts these modes.
Starting IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Yes Reset input No No Interrupt request Yes "0" IMF
Reset
Normal release mode
"1" (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction
Figure 2-10 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes
Page 20
TMP86FH12MG
* Start the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes After IMF is set to "0", set the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) which releases IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. To start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master enable flag (IMF). After releasing IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode. (1) Normal release mode (IMF = "0") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual interrupt enable flag (EF). After the interrupt is generated, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction. Normally, the interrupt latches (IL) of the interrupt source used for releasing must be cleared to "0" by load instructions. (2) Interrupt release mode (IMF = "1") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) and the interrupt processing is started. After the interrupt is processed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes.
Note: When a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes will not be started.
Page 21
Main system clock
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Interrupt request a+2 SET (SYSCR2). 4 Operate Halt a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
Watchdog timer
(a) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a)
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+3 Instruction address a + 2 Operate Normal release mode a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-11 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes Start/Release
Page 22
a+3 Acceptance of interrupt Operate Operate Interrupt release mode
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
Interrupt request
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
TMP86FH12MG
(b) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes release
TMP86FH12MG
2.2.4.3
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and the time base timer control register (TBTCR). The following status is maintained during IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. 1. Timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except TBT. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes.
Note: Before starting IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, be sure to stop (Disable) peripherals.
Stopping peripherals by instruction
Starting IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Reset input No No TBT source clock falling edge Yes TBTCR = "1" Yes TBT interrupt enable Yes No IMF = "1"
Yes
Reset
No
No
(Normal release mode)
Yes (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes start instruction
Figure 2-12 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes
Page 23
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
* Start the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes Stop (Disable) peripherals such as a timer counter. To start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master flag (IMF), the individual interrupt enable flag of TBT and TBTCR. After releasing IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1". IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start/release without reference to TBTCR setting.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF*EF1*TBTCR = "0") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR. After the falling edge is detected, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start instruction. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1".
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF*EF1*TBTCR = "1") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR and INTTBT interrupt processing is started.
Note 1: Because returning from IDLE0, SLEEP0 to NORMAL1, SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0, SLEEP0 mode might be the shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 2: When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated immediately before IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode is started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode will not be started.
Page 24
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+2 a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 2
Halt
Watchdog timer
Operate
(a) IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a
Main system clock
TBT clock a+3 a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-13 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes Start/Release
Page 25
Instruction address a + 2 Operate
Normal release mode a+3
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
TBT clock
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Acceptance of interrupt Operate
Interrupt release mode
(b) IDLE and SLEEP0 modes release
TMP86FH12MG
Watchdog timer
Halt
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FH12MG
2.2.4.4
SLOW mode
SLOW mode is controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2). The following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter. (1) Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode First, set SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2 mode. Next, clear SYSCR2 to turn off high-frequency oscillation.
Note: The high-frequency clock can be continued oscillation in order to return to NORMAL2 mode from SLOW mode quickly. Always turn off oscillation of high-frequency clock when switching from SLOW mode to stop mode.
Example 1 :Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode.
SET (SYSCR2). 5 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
Example 2 :Switching to the SLOW1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized.
SET LD LD LDW DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRH). 5 (SYSCR2). 6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H ; SYSCR2 1 ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fs for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time (Depend on oscillator accompanied) ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 26
TMP86FH12MG
(2)
Switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode First, set SYSCR2 to turn on the high-frequency oscillation. When time for stabilization (Warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (TC4,TC3), clear SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the high-frequency clock. SLOW mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: After SYSCK is cleared to "0", executing the instructions is continiued by the low-frequency clock for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks.
High-frequency clock Low-frequency clock Main system clock SYSCK
Example :Switching from the SLOW1 mode to the NORMAL2 mode (fc = 16 MHz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms).
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 0 (Switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRH). 5 (SYSCR2). 7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG4), 0F8H ; SYSCR2 1 (Starts high-frequency oscillation) ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fc for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 27
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock Turn off
SYSCK
XEN CLR (SYSCR2). 7 SLOW2 mode (a) Switching to the SLOW mode
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 5
NORMAL2 mode
SLOW1 mode
Figure 2-14 Switching between the NORMAL2 and SLOW Modes
Page 28
CLR (SYSCR2). 5 Warm up during SLOW2 mode (b) Switching to the NORMAL2 mode
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock
SYSCK
XEN
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 7
TMP86FH12MG
SLOW1 mode
NORMAL2 mode
TMP86FH12MG
2.3 Reset Circuit
The TMP86FH12MG has four types of reset generation procedures: An external reset input, an address trap reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system clock reset. Of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the system clock reset are a malfunction reset. When the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the maximum 24/fc[s]. The malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initialized when power is turned on. Therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz) when power is turned on. Table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action. Table 2-3 Initializing Internal Status by Reset Action
On-chip Hardware Program counter Stack pointer General-purpose registers (W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX, IY) Jump status flag Zero flag Carry flag Half carry flag Sign flag Overflow flag Interrupt master enable flag Interrupt individual enable flags Interrupt latches (JF) (ZF) (CF) (HF) (SF) (VF) (IMF) (EF) (IL) (PC) (SP) Initial Value (FFFEH) Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Output latches of I/O ports Not initialized Not initialized 0 0 Control registers 0 RAM Refer to each of control register Not initialized Refer to I/O port circuitry Watchdog timer Enable Prescaler and divider of timing generator 0 On-chip Hardware Initial Value
2.3.1
External Reset Input
The RESET pin contains a Schmitt trigger (Hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor. When the RESET pin is held at "L" level for at least 3 machine cycles (12/fc [s]) with the power supply voltage within the operating voltage range and oscillation stable, a reset is applied and the internal state is initialized. When the RESET pin input goes high, the reset operation is released and the program execution starts at the vector address stored at addresses FFFEH to FFFFH.
VDD
RESET
Internal reset Watchdog timer reset Malfunction reset output circuit Address trap reset System clock reset
Figure 2-15 Reset Circuit
Page 29
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86FH12MG
2.3.2
Address trap reset
If the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (when WDTCR1 is set to "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. The reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz).
Note:The operating mode under address trapped is alternative of reset or interrupt. The address trap area is alternative.
Instruction execution Internal reset
JP a Address trap is occurred
Reset release
Instruction at address r
maximum 24/fc [s]
4/fc to 12/fc [s]
16/fc [s]
Note 1: Address "a" is in the SFR, DBR or on-chip RAM (WDTCR1 = "1") space. Note 2: During reset release, reset vector "r" is read out, and an instruction at address "r" is fetched and decoded.
Figure 2-16 Address Trap Reset 2.3.3 Watchdog timer reset
Refer to Section "Watchdog Timer".
2.3.4
System clock reset
If the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the CPU. (The oscillation is continued without stopping.) - In case of clearing SYSCR2 and SYSCR2 simultaneously to "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "1". The reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 s at 16.0 MHz).
Page 30
TMP86FH12MG
Page 31
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86FH12MG
Page 32
TMP86FH12MG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP86FH12MG has a total of 22 interrupt sources excluding reset. Interrupts can be nested with priorities. Four of the internal interrupt sources are non-maskable while the rest are maskable. Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. The interrupt latch is set to "1" by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Latch - - - IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 IL10 IL11 IL12 IL13 IL14 IL15 IL16 IL17 IL18 IL19 IL20 IL21 IL22 IL23 IL24 IL25 IL26 IL27 IL28 IL29 IL30 IL31 Vector Address FFFE FFFC FFFC FFFA FFF8 FFF6 FFF4 FFF2 FFF0 FFEE FFEC FFEA FFE8 FFE6 FFE4 FFE2 FFE0 FFBE FFBC FFBA FFB8 FFB6 FFB4 FFB2 FFB0 FFAE FFAC FFAA FFA8 FFA6 FFA4 FFA2 FFA0
Interrupt Factors Internal/External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External Internal External Internal External Internal Internal Internal External Internal Internal Internal Internal External Internal Internal External (Reset) INTSWI (Software interrupt) INTUNDEF (Executed the undefined instruction interrupt) INTATRAP (Address trap interrupt) INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt) INTEMG Reserved
INT0
Enable Condition Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable IMF* EF4 = 1 IMF* EF5 = 1 IMF* EF6 = 1, INT0EN = 1 IMF* EF7 = 1 IMF* EF8 = 1 IMF* EF9 = 1 IMF* EF10 = 1 IMF* EF11 = 1 IMF* EF12 = 1 IMF* EF13 = 1 IMF* EF14 = 1 IMF* EF15 = 1 IMF* EF16 = 1 IMF* EF17 = 1 IMF* EF18 = 1 IMF* EF19 = 1 IMF* EF20 = 1 IMF* EF21 = 1 IMF* EF22 = 1 IMF* EF23 = 1 IMF* EF24 = 1 IMF* EF25 = 1 IMF* EF26 = 1 IMF* EF27 = 1 IMF* EF28 = 1 IMF* EF29 = 1 IMF* EF30 = 1 IMF* EF31 = 1
Priority 1 2 2 2 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
INTTC1 INT1 INTTBT INT2 INTTC7T Reserved INTTC4 INTTC3 Reserved Reserved INT3 INTSIO INTADC INTRXD INTTXD INT4 INTTC7P Reserved Reserved Reserved INTRTC
INT5
Reserved Reserved Reserved
Note 1: To use the address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "reset request" after reset is cancelled). For details, see "Address Trap". Note 2: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after reset is released). For details, see "Watchdog Timer".
Page 33
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL28 to IL2) TMP86FH12MG
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL28 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to "1", and the CPU is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to "0" during reset. The interrupt latches are located on address 002EH, 002FH, 003CH and 003DH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 and IL3 should be set to "1". If the read-modifywrite instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed. Interrupt latches are not set to "1" by an instruction. Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
DI LDW EI (ILL), 1110100000111111B ; IMF 0 ; IL12, IL10 to IL6 0 ; IMF 1
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latchess
LD WA, (ILL) ; W ILH, A ILL
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
TEST JR (ILL). 7 F, SSET ; if IL7 = 1 then jump
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the non-maskable interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Nonmaskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR. The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These registers are located on address 002CH, 002DH, 003AH and 003BH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an instructions (Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. While IMF = "0", all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to "1", the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to "0" after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled. By executing return interrupt instruction [RETI/RETN], the stacked data, which was the status before interrupt acceptance, is loaded on IMF again. The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction. The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to "0". Page 34
TMP86FH12MG
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF28 to EF4)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to "1" enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to "0" disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF28 to EF4) are initialized to "0" and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to "1".
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
DI LDW : : EI ; IMF 1 (EIRL), 1110100010100000B ; IMF 0 ; EF15 to EF13, EF11, EF7, EF5 1 Note: IMF should not be set.
Example 2 :C compiler description example
unsigned int _io (3AH) EIRL; _DI(); EIRL = 10100000B; : _EI(); /* 3AH shows EIRL address */
Page 35
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86FH12MG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: *00*0000 00*000**) ILH,ILL (003DH, 003CH) 15 - 14 IL14 13 IL13 12 - 11 IL11 10 IL10 9 IL9 8 IL8 7 IL7 6 IL6 5 - 4 IL4 3 IL3 2 IL2 1 0
ILH (003DH)
ILL (003CH)
(Initial value: ***00*** 0000000*) ILD,ILE (002FH, 002EH) 15 - 14 - 13 - 12 IL28 11 IL27 10 - 9 - 8 - 7 IL23 6 IL22 5 IL21 4 IL20 3 IL19 2 IL18 1 IL17 0 -
ILD (002FH)
ILE (002EH)
IL28 to IL2
Interrupt latches
at RD 0: No interrupt request 1: Interrupt request
at WR 0: Clears the interrupt request 1: (Interrupt latch is not set.)
R/W
Note 1: To clear any one of bits IL7 to IL4, be sure to write "1" into IL2 and IL3. Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1". Note 3: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: *00*0000 00*0***0) EIRH,EIRL (003BH, 003AH) 15 - 14 EF14 13 EF13 12 - 11 EF11 10 EF10 9 EF9 8 EF8 7 EF7 6 EF6 5 - 4 EF4 EIRL (003AH) 3 2 1 0 IMF
EIRH (003BH)
(Initial value: ***00*** 0000000*) EIRD,EIRE (002DH, 002CH) 15 - 14 - 13 - 12 EF28 11 EF27 10 - 9 - 8 - 7 EF23 6 EF22 5 EF21 4 EF20 3 EF19 2 EF18 1 EF17 0 -
EIRD (002DH)
EIRE (002CH)
EF28 to EF4 IMF
Individual-interrupt enable flag (Specified for each bit) Interrupt master enable flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: *: Don't care Note 2: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF15 to EF4) to "1" at the same time. Note 3: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 36
TMP86FH12MG
3.3 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to "0" by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 s @16 MHz) after the completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.3.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to "0" in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt. b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to "0". c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSW + IMF, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 3. d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter. e. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
1-machine cycle
Interrupt service task
Interrupt request Interrupt latch (IL)
IMF Execute instruction a-1 Execute instruction Execute instruction
Interrupt acceptance
Execute RETI instruction
PC
a
a+1
a
b
b+1 b+2 b + 3
c+1
c+2
a
a+1 a+2
SP
n
n-1 n-2
n-3
n-2 n-1
n
Note 1: a: Return address entry address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt service program
Vector table address
Entry address Interrupt service program
FFECH FFEDH
03H D2H
Vector
D203H D204H
0FH 06H
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
Page 37
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.3 Interrupt Sequence TMP86FH12MG
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to "1" even if the maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to "1" in the interrupt service program. In this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags. To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting IMF to "1". As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested.
3.3.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. The following methods are used to save/restore the generalpurpose registers.
3.3.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx: PUSH WA ; Save WA register (interrupt processing) POP RETI WA ; Restore WA register ; RETURN
Address (Example) SP A SP PCL PCH PSW At acceptance of an interrupt W PCL PCH PSW At execution of PUSH instruction SP PCL PCH PSW At execution of POP instruction SP b-5 b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b At execution of RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.3.2.2 Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Page 38
TMP86FH12MG
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx: LD (GSAVA), A ; Save A register (interrupt processing) LD RETI A, (GSAVA) ; Restore A register ; RETURN
Main task Interrupt acceptance Interrupt service task Saving registers
Restoring registers Interrupt return Saving/Restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing 3.3.3 Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI]/[RETN] Interrupt Return 1. Program counter (PC) and program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are restored from the stack. 2. Stack pointer (SP) is incremented by 3.
As for address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), it is required to alter stacked data for program counter (PC) to restarting address, during interrupt service program.
Note:If [RETN] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and INTATRAP occurs again.When interrupt acceptance processing has completed, stacked data for PCL and PCH are located on address (SP + 1) and (SP + 2) respectively.
Example 1 :Returning from address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) service program
PINTxx: POP LD PUSH WA WA, Return Address WA ; Recover SP by 2 ; ; Alter stacked data
(interrupt processing) RETN ; RETURN
Page 39
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW) TMP86FH12MG
Example 2 :Restarting without returning interrupt (In this case, PSW (Includes IMF) before interrupt acceptance is discarded.)
PINTxx: INC INC INC SP SP SP ; Recover SP by 3 ; ;
(interrupt processing) LD JP EIRL, data Restart Address ; Set IMF to "1" or clear it to "0" ; Jump into restarting address
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Note 1: It is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before INTATRAP (Increment 3 times), if return interrupt instruction [RETN] is not utilized during interrupt service program under INTATRAP (such as Example 2). Note 2: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task.
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW is highest prioritized interrupt). Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.4.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.4.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting address.
3.5 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF)
Taking code which is not defined as authorized instruction for instruction causes INTUNDEF. INTUNDEF is generated when the CPU fetches such a code and tries to execute it. INTUNDEF is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTUNDEF interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The undefined instruction interrupt (INTUNDEF) forces CPU to jump into vector address, as software interrupt (SWI) does.
3.6 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
Fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructions (Address trapped area) causes reset output or address trap interrupt (INTATRAP). INTATRAP is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTATRAP interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on watchdog timer control register (WDTCR).
Page 40
TMP86FH12MG
3.7 External Interrupts
The TMP86FH12MG has 6 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise). Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT4. The INT0/P31 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. Edge selection, noise reject control and INT0/P31 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (EINTCR).
Source Pin Enable Conditions Release Edge (level) Digital Noise Reject Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
INT0
INT0
IMF
EF6
INT0EN=1
Falling edge
INT1
INT1
IMF
EF8 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT2
INT2
IMF
EF10 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT3
INT3
IMF
EF17 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT4
INT4
IMF
EF22 = 1
Falling edge, Rising edge, Falling and Rising edge or H level
INT5
INT5
IMF
EF28 = 1
Falling edge
Note 1: In NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. Note 2: When INT0EN = "0", IL6 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input. Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 41
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.7 External Interrupts TMP86FH12MG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR (0037H) 7 INT1NC 6 INT0EN 5 INT4ES 4 3 INT3ES 2 INT2ES 1 INT1ES 0 (Initial value: 0000 000*)
INT1NC INT0EN
Noise reject time select P31/INT0 pin configuration
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 0: P31 input/output port 1: INT0 pin (Port P31 should be set to an input mode) 00: Rising edge 01: Falling edge 10: Rising edge and Falling edge 11: H level 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
R/W R/W
INT4 ES
INT4 edge select
R/W
INT3 ES INT2 ES INT1 ES
INT3 edge select INT2 edge select INT1 edge select
R/W R/W R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: When the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register (EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR). Note 3: The maximum time from modifying INT1NC until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc. Note 4: In case RESET pin is released while the state of INT4 pin keeps "H" level, the external interrupt 4 request is not generated even if the INT4 edge select is specified as "H" level. The rising edge is needed after RESET pin is released.
Page 42
TMP86FH12MG
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
The TMP86FH12MG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 0F80H to 0FFFH. This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for TMP86FH12MG.
4.1 SFR
Address 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H 000AH 000BH 000CH 000DH 000EH 000FH 0010H 0011H 0012H 0013H 0014H 0015H 0016H 0017H 0018H 0019H 001AH 001BH 001CH 001DH 001EH 001FH 0020H 0021H 0022H 0023H 0024H 0025H ADCDR2 ADCDR1 UARTSR Reserved Reserved ADCCR1 P0PRD P2PRD TC1DRAL TC1DRAH TC1DRBL TC1DRBH TC1CR TC3CR TC4CR PWREG3 PWREG4 TTREG3 TTREG4 RTCCR Reserved Reserved Reserved UARTCR1 UARTCR2 Read P0DR P1DR P2DR P3DR P0OUTCR P1CR P3CR1 P3CR2 TC7DRAL TC7DRAH TC7DRBL TC7DRBH TC7DRCL TC7DRCH Write
Page 43
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 SFR TMP86FH12MG
Address 0026H 0027H 0028H 0029H 002AH 002BH 002CH 002DH 002EH 002FH 0030H 0031H 0032H 0033H 0034H 0035H 0036H 0037H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH 003DH 003EH 003FH
Read ADCCR2 Reserved Reserved TC7CR1 TC7CR2 TC7CR3 EIRE EIRD ILE ILD Reserved SIOSR Reserved TBTCR EINTCR SYSCR1 SYSCR2 EIRL EIRH ILL ILH Reserved PSW
Write
SIOCR1 SIOCR2
WDTCR1 WDTCR2
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 44
TMP86FH12MG
4.2 DBR
Address 0F80H 0F81H 0F82H 0F83H 0F84H 0F85H 0F86H 0F87H 0F88H 0F89H 0F8AH 0F8BH 0F8CH 0F8DH 0F8EH 0F8FH 0F90H 0F91H 0F92H 0F93H 0F94H 0F95H 0F96H 0F97H 0F98H 0F99H 0F9AH 0F9BH 0F9CH 0F9DH 0F9EH 0F9FH RDBUF Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Read SIOBR0 SIOBR1 SIOBR2 SIOBR3 SIOBR4 SIOBR5 SIOBR6 SIOBR7 STOPCR TDBUF Write
Page 45
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86FH12MG
Address 0FA0H 0FA1H 0FA2H 0FA3H 0FA4H 0FA5H 0FA6H 0FA7H 0FA8H 0FA9H 0FAAH 0FABH 0FACH 0FADH 0FAEH 0FAFH 0FB0H 0FB1H 0FB2H 0FB3H 0FB4H 0FB5H 0FB6H 0FB7H 0FB8H 0FB9H 0FBAH 0FBBH 0FBCH 0FBDH 0FBEH 0FBFH
Read Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TC7DRDL TC7DRDH TC7DREL TC7DREH TC7CAPAL TC7CAPAH TC7CAPBL TC7CAPBH Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
-
Address 0FC0H :: 0FDFH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Page 46
TMP86FH12MG
Address 0FE0H 0FE1H 0FE2H 0FE3H 0FE4H 0FE5H 0FE6H 0FE7H 0FE8H 0FE9H 0FEAH 0FEBH 0FECH 0FEDH 0FEEH 0FEFH 0FF0H 0FF1H 0FF2H 0FF3H 0FF4H 0FF5H 0FF6H 0FF7H 0FF8H 0FF9H 0FFAH 0FFBH 0FFCH 0FFDH 0FFEH 0FFFH
Read Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SPCR Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FLSCR
Write
FLSSTB
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 47
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86FH12MG
Page 48
TMP86FH12MG
5. I/O Ports
The TMP86FH12MG has 4 parallel input/output ports (24 pins) as follows.
Primary Function Port P0 Port P1 Port P2 Port P3 8-bit I/O port 5-bit I/O port 3-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port Secondary Functions External interrupt, serial interface input/output, UART input/output and timer counter input/output. External interrupt and timer counter input/output. Low-frequency resonator connections, external interrupt input, STOP mode release signal input. External interrupt, analog input and STOP mode release signal input.
Each output port contains a latch, which holds the output data. All input ports do not have latches, so the external input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several timer before processing. Figure 5-1 shows input/output timing examples. External data is read from an I/O port in the S1 state of the read cycle during execution of the read instruction. This timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the program. Output data changes in the S2 state of the write cycle during execution of the instruction which writes to an I/O port.
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Read cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Instruction execution cycle
Example: LD
A, (x)
Input strobe
Data input (a) Input timing Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Fetch cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Write cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3
Instruction execution cycle
Example: LD
(x), A
Output strobe Old (b) Output timing New
Data output
Note: The positions of the read and write cycles may vary, depending on the instruction.
Figure 5-1 Input/Output Timing (Example)
Page 49
5. I/O Ports
5.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00) TMP86FH12MG
5.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00)
Port P0 is an 8-bit input/output port. Port P0 is also used as an external interrupt input, a serial interface input/output, an UART input/output and a timer/counter input/output. It can be selected whether output circuit of P0 port is a C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting P0OUTCR. During reset, the P0DR is initialized to "1", and the P0OUTCR is initialized to "0". When a corresponding bit of P0OUTCR is "0". the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and when a corresponding bit of P0OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output. When used as an input port, an external interrupt input, a serial interface input ,an UART input and a timer/counter input , the corresponding output control (P0OUTCR) should be set to "0" after P0DR is set to "1". When using this port as a PPG1 and/or PPG2 output, set the output latch (P0DR), and then set the P0OUTCR. Next, set the PPG output initial value in the PPG1INI and/or PPG2INI, and set the PPG1OE and/or PPG2OE to "1" to enable PPG output. At this time, the output latch (P0DR) should be set to the same value as the PPG output initial value in the PPG1INI, PPG2INI. During reset, the P0DR is initialized to "1", and the P0OUTCR is initialized to "0". P0 port output latch (P0DR) and P0 port terminal input (P0PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P0DR should be read. When read the terminal input data, the P0PRD register should be read. Table 5-1 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports (P07 to P00)
Programmed Value Function P0DR Port input, external interrupt input, serial interface input, timer counter input or UART input Port "0" output Port "1" output, serial interface output or UART output Timer counter 7 output "1" "0" "1" Set to the same value as PPG1INI and PPG2INI Programming for each applications P0OUTCR "0"
Page 50
TMP86FH12MG
STOP OUTEN P0OUTCRi P0OUTCRi (P0PRD) (P0DR) (P0DR)
D Q D Q
P0i
STOP OUTEN P0OUTCRj P0OUTCRj (P0PRD) (P0DR) Data output (P0DR)
D Q A B D Q
P0j
S
Note: i = 5 to 0, j = 7 and 6, k = 2 and 1
Figure 5-2 Port 0
Page 51
5. I/O Ports
5.1 Port P0 (P07 to P00) TMP86FH12MG
P0DR (0000H) R/W
7 P07 PPG2 INT2
6 P06 PPG1
INT1
5 P05 TC7
4 P04 SO
3 P03 SI
2 P02 SCK
1 P01 RXD
0 P00
TXD
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
P0OUTCR (0004H)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P0OUTCR
Port P0 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: C-MOS output
R/W
P0PRD (0008H) Read only
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
Page 52
TMP86FH12MG
5.2 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
Port P1 is an 5-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or output in one-bit unit. Port P1 is also used as a timer/counter input/output, an external interrupt input and a divider output. Input/output mode is specified by the P1 control register (P1CR). During reset, the P1CR is initialized to "0" and port P1 becomes an input mode. And the P1DR is initialized to "0". When used as an input port, a timer/counter input and an external interrupt input, the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "1". When used as a timer/counter output and a divider output, P1DR is set to "1" beforehand and the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "1". When P1CR is "1", the content of the corresponding output latch is read by reading P1DR. If a read instruction is executed for the P1DR and P1CR, read data of bits 7 to 5 are unstable. Table 5-2 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P1DR Port input, timer/counter input or external interrupt input Port "0" output Port "1" output, a timer output or a divider output * "0" "1" P1CR "0" "1" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
STOP OUTEN P1CRi P1CRi input
D Q
Data input (P1DR)
Data output (P1DR) Control output Control input
Note: i = 7 to 0
D
Q
P1i
Output latch
Figure 5-3 Port 1
Note: The port set to an input mode reads the terminal input data. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the content of the output latch which is specified as input mode might be changed by executing a bit Manipulation instruction.
Page 53
5. I/O Ports
5.2 Port P1 (P17 to P10) TMP86FH12MG
7 P1DR (0001H) R/W
6
5
4 P14 TC1
INT4
3 P13
PPG
2 P12
DVO
1 P11 TC4 PWM4 PDO4 PPG4
0 P10 TC3 PWM3 PDO3
INT3
(Initial value: ***0 0000)
P1CR (0005H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
P1CR
I/O control for port P1 (Specified for each bit)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Page 54
TMP86FH12MG
5.3 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
Port P2 is a 3-bit input/output port. It is also used as an external interrupt, a STOP mode release signal input, and low-frequency crystal oscillator connection pins. When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (P2DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P2DR is initialized to "1". A low-frequency crystal oscillator (32.768 kHz) is connected to pins P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) in the dualclock mode. In the single-clock mode, pins P21 and P22 can be used as normal input/output ports. It is recommended that pin P20 should be used as an external interrupt input, a STOP mode release signal input, or an input port. If it is used as an output port, the interrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse. P2 port output latch (P2DR) and P2 port terminal input (P2PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P2DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P2PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P2, read data of bits 7 to 3 are unstable.
Data input (P20PRD) Data input (P20) Data output (P20) Contorl input Data input (P21PRD) Output latch read (P21) Data output (P21) Data input (P22PRD) Output latch read (P22) Data output (P22)
D Q D Q D Q
P20 (INT5, STOP)
Output latch
Osc. enable P21 (XTIN)
Output latch
P22 (XTOUT)
Output latch STOP OUTEN XTEN fs
Figure 5-4 Port 2
P2DR (0002H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2 P22 XTOUT
1 P21 XTIN
0 P20
INT5 STOP
(Initial value: **** *111)
P2PRD (0009H) Read only
P22
P21
P20
Note: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes high-Z mode.
Page 55
5. I/O Ports
5.4 Port P3 (P37 to 30) TMP86FH12MG
5.4 Port P3 (P37 to 30)
Port P3 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or output in one-bit unit. Port P3 is also used as an analog input, key-on wakeup input, an external interrupt and TC7 emergency stop input. Input/output mode is specified by the P3 control register (P3CR1) and P3 input control register (P3CR2). During reset, the P3CR1 is initialized to "0" the P3CR2 is initialized to "1" and port P3 becomes an input mode. And the P3DR is initialized to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P3CR1 should be set to "1". When used as an input port, key-on wakeup input, an external interrupt input and TC7 emergency stop input, the corresponding bit of P3CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of P3CR2 should be set to "1". When used as an analog input, the corresponding bit of P3CR1 should be set to "0" and then, the corresponding bit of P6CR2 should be set to "0". When P3CR1 is "1", the content of the corresponding output latch is read by reading P3DR. Table 5-3 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P3DR Port input or key-on wakeup input or external input or TC7 emergency stop input Analog input Port "0" output Port "1" output * * "0" "1" P3CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P3CR2 "1" "0" * *
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-4 Values Read from P3DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P3DR P3CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P3CR2 "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents "0" Terminal input data
Page 56
TMP86FH12MG
P3CR2i P3CR2i P3CR1i P3CR1i
D
Q
D
Q
(P3DRi)
(P3DRi) STOP OUTTEN AINDS SAIN
D
Q
P3i
a) P37,P32 to P30
STOPkEN P3CR2j P3CR2j P3CR1j P3CR1j (P3DRj)
D Q D Q
(P3DRj) STOP OUTTEN AINDS SAIN
D
Q
P3j
b) P36 to P33
Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-5 Port 3
Page 57
5. I/O Ports
5.4 Port P3 (P37 to 30) TMP86FH12MG
P3DR (0003H) R/W
7 P37 AIN7
6 P36 AIN6 STOP3
5 P35 AIN5 STOP2
4 P34 AIN4 STOP1
3 P33 AIN3 STOP0
2 P32 AIN2
1 P31 AIN1 INT0
0 P30 AIN0 EMG (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P3CR1 (0006H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P3CR1
I/O control for port P3 (Specified for each bit)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P3CR2 (0007H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P3CR2
P3 port input control (Specified for each bit)
0: Analog input 1: Port input or key-on wakeup input or external interrupt input or TC7 emergency stop input
R/W
Note 1: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction. Note 2: When used as an analog inport, be sure to clear the corresponding bit of P3CR2 to disable the port input. Note 3: Do not set the output mode (P3CR1 = "1") for the pin used as an analog input pin. Note 4: Pins not used for analog input can be used as I/O ports. During AD conversion, output instructions should not be executed to keep a precision. In addition, a variable signal should not be input to a port adjacent to the analog input during AD conversion.
Page 58
TMP86FH12MG
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine. The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as "reset request" or "interrupt request". Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to "reset request". When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise.
6.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
fc/2 or fs/2 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/219 or fs/211 fc/217 or fs/29
23 15
Selector
Binary counters Clock Clear 1 2 Overflow WDT output
R S Q Reset request INTWDT interrupt request
2
Interrupt request
Internal reset Q SR
WDTEN WDTT
Writing disable code
Writing clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H WDTCR1
0035H WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 6-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 59
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86FH12MG
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
6.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When WDTCR1 is set to "1" at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is initialized. When WDTCR1 is set to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated. The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE/SLEEP mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE/SLEEP mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to WDTCR1.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
LD LD LD (WDTCR2), 4EH (WDTCR1), 00001101B (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters. : WDTT 10, WDTOUT 1 : Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing WDTT).
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: :
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: : LD (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters.
Page 60
TMP86FH12MG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 (ATAS) 4 (ATOUT) 3 WDTEN 2 WDTT 1 0 WDTOUT (Initial value: **11 1001)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.) 1: Enable NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 217/fs 215/fs 213/fs 211/fs SLOW1/2 mode 217/fs 215fs 213fs 211/fs
Write only
WDTT
Watchdog timer detection time [s]
00 01 10 11
225/fc 223/fc 221fc 219/fc
Write only
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer output select
0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
Note 1: After clearing WDTOUT to "0", the program cannot set it to "1". Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a don't care is read. Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode. After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated. Note 5: To clear WDTEN, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in "1.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable".
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code) D2H: Enable assigning address trap area Others: Invalid
Write only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1 = 0. Note 2: *: Don't care Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. Note 4: Write the clear code 4EH using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1.
6.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1 to "1" enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1 is initialized to "1" during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 61
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86FH12MG
6.2.3
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to "0". 2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH). 3. Set WDTCR1 to "0". 4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
DI LD LDW (WDTCR2), 04EH (WDTCR1), 0B101H : IMF 0 : Clears the binary coutner : WDTEN 0, WDTCR2 Disable code
Table 6-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz) Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 2.097 524.288 m 131.072 m 32.768 m NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 1 4 1 250 m 62.5 m SLOW mode 4 1 250 m 62.5 m
6.2.4
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1 is cleared to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1.
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD LD SP, 023FH (WDTCR1), 00001000B : Sets the stack pointer : WDTOUT 0
Page 62
TMP86FH12MG
6.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1 is set to "1", a watchdog timer reset request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When a watchdog timer reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
219/fc [s] 217/fc Clock Binary counter Overflow INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1= "0")
(WDTT=11) 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0
Internal reset
(WDTCR1= "1")
A reset occurs Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 6-2 Watchdog Timer Interrupt
Page 63
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86FH12MG
6.3 Address Trap
The Watchdog Timer Control Register 1 and 2 share the addresses with the control registers to generate address traps. Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 ATAS 4 ATOUT 3 (WDTEN) 2 (WDTT) 1 0 (WDTOUT) (Initial value: **11 1001)
ATAS
Select address trap generation in the internal RAM area Select opertion at address trap
0: Generate no address trap 1: Generate address traps (After setting ATAS to "1", writing the control code D2H to WDTCR2 is reguired) 0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
ATOUT
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code and address trap area control code
D2H: Enable address trap area selection (ATRAP control code) 4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (WDT clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (WDT disable code) Others: Invalid
Write only
6.3.1
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS)
WDTCR1 specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the internal RAM area. To execute an instruction in the internal RAM area, clear WDTCR1 to "0". To enable the WDTCR1 setting, set WDTCR1 and then write D2H to WDTCR2. Executing an instruction in the SFR or DBR area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the setting in WDTCR1.
6.3.2
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT)
When an address trap is generated, either the interrupt request or the reset request can be selected by WDTCR1.
6.3.3
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
While WDTCR1 is "0", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) will be generated. An address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When an address trap interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand.
Page 64
TMP86FH12MG
6.3.4
Address Trap Reset
While WDTCR1 is "1", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. When an address trap reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When an address trap reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
Page 65
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86FH12MG
Page 66
TMP86FH12MG
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base timer interrupt (INTTBT).
7.1 Time Base Timer
7.1.1 Configuration
MPX
fc/223 or fs/215 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/216 or fs/28 fc/214 or fs/26 fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/29 or fs/2
Source clock
Falling edge detector
IDLE0, SLEEP0 release request
INTTBT interrupt request
3 TBTCK TBTCR Time base timer control register TBTEN
Figure 7-1 Time Base Timer configuration 7.1.2 Control
Time Base Timer is controled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR). Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 TBTEN 2 1 TBTCK 0 (Initial Value: 0000 0000)
TBTEN
Time Base Timer enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 fc/223 fc/221 fc/216 fc/2
14
DV7CK = 1 fs/215 fs/213 fs/28 fs/2
6
SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/215 fs/213 - - - - - - R/W
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt Frequency select : [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
fc/213 fc/2
12
fs/25 fs/2
4
fc/211 fc/2
9
fs/23 fs/2
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care
Page 67
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer TMP86FH12MG
Note 2: The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD LD DI SET (EIRH) . 1 (TBTCR) , 00000010B (TBTCR) , 00001010B ; TBTCK 010 ; TBTEN 1 ; IMF 0
Table 7-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz] TBTCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1.91 7.63 244.14 976.56 1953.13 3906.25 7812.5 31250 NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 1 1 4 128 512 1024 2048 4096 16384 1 4 - - - - - - SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
7.1.3
Function
An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider output of the timing generato which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled. The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( Figure 7-2 ).
Source clock
TBTCR
INTTBT Interrupt period Enable TBT
Figure 7-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Page 68
TMP86FH12MG
7.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
7.2.1
Configuration
Output latch Data output D Q DVO pin
fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/210 or fs/22
MPX A B CY D S 2 DVOCK TBTCR Divider output control register (a) configuration DVOEN
Port output latch TBTCR
DVO pin output (b) Timing chart
Figure 7-3 Divider Output 7.2.2 Control
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register. Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) DVOEN 6 DVOCK 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DVOEN
Divider output enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22 SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22
R/W
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO) frequency selection: [Hz]
00 01 10 11
fc/213 fc/212 fc/211 fc/210
R/W
Note: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency.
Page 69
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.2 Divider Output (DVO) TMP86FH12MG
Example :1.95 kHz pulse output (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B (TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOCK "00" ; DVOEN "1"
Table 7-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz] DVOCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 1.953 k 3.906 k 7.813 k 15.625 k DV7CK = 1 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k
Page 70
TMP86FH12MG
8. Real-Time Clock
The TMP86FH12MG include a real time counter (RTC). A low-frequency clock can be used to provide a periodic interrupt (0.0625[s],0.125[s],0.25[s],0.50[s]) at a programmed interval, implement the clock function. The RTC can be used in the mode in which the low-frequency oscillator is active (except for the SLEEP0 mode).
8.1 Configuration
RTCCR Selector RTCSEL RTCRUN 211/fs 212/fs 213/fs 214/fs fs (32.768 kHz) Binary counter Interrupt request INTRTC
Figure 8-1 Configuration of the RTC
8.2 Control of the RTC
The RTC is controlled by the RTC control register (RTCCR). RTC Control Register
RTCCR (001BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RTCSEL 1 0 RTCRUN (Initial value: **** *000)
RTCSEL
Interrupt generation period (fs = 32.768 kHz)
00: 0.50 [s] 01: 0.25 [s] 10: 0.125 [s] 11: 0.0625 [s] 0: Stops and clears the binary counter. 1: Starts counting
R/W
RTCRUN
RTC control
Note 1: Program the RTCCR during low-frequency oscillation (when SYSCR2 = "1"). For selecting an interrupt generation period, program the RTCSEL when the timer is inactive (RTCRUN = "0"). During the timer operation, do not change the RTCSEL programming at the same moment the timer stops. Note 2: The timer automatically stops, and this register is initialized (the timer's binary counter is also initialized) if one of the following operations is performed while the timer is active: 1. Stopping the low-frequency oscillation (with SYSCR2 = "0") 2. When the TMP86FH12MG are put in STOP or SLEEP0 mode Therefore, before activating the timer after releasing from STOP or SLEEP0 mode, reprogram the registers again. Note 3: If a read instruction for RTCCR is executed, undefined value is set to bits 7 to 3. Note 4: If break processing is performed on the debugger for the development tool during the timer operation, the timer stops counting (contents of the RTCCR isn't altered). When the break is cancelled, processing is restarted from the point at which it was suspended.
Page 71
8. Real-Time Clock
8.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
8.3 Function
The RTC counts up on the internal low-frequency clock. When RTCCR is set to "1", the binary counter starts counting up. Each time the end of the period specified with RTCCR is detected, an INTRTC interrupt is generated, and the binary counter is cleared. The timer continues counting up even after the binary counter is cleared.
Page 72
TMP86FH12MG
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.1 Configuration
CSIDIS
TC7CR3
TC7ST EMGF
fc fc/2 fc/22 fc/23 PPG2INI PPG1INI
A B C D S
CSTC
STM
CNTBF INTTC7T interrupt request
Y
10-bit up counter Start/ clear TGRAM
TC7CK
TC7CR1
NCRSEL TRGSEL Edge detection CSIDIS
TC7CAPA Capture control
TC7CAPB
TC7 pin
Noise canceller
INTTC7P interrupt request PPG1 Comparator PPG output control
TC7OUT PPG1OE/ PPG1INI/ PPG2OE PPG2INI
PPG2
Compare register A
Compare register B
Compare register C
Compare register D
Compare register E
Transfer control
TC7DRA TC7DRB TC7DRC TC7DRD TC7DRE
EMGF
Emergency stop
EMG pin
Emergency output stop control EMGIE CSTC EMGR
INTEMG interrupt request
PPG2OE PPG1OE
TC7CR2
TC7OUT
Figure 9-1 10-Bit Timer/Counter 7
9.2 Control
Timer/counter 7 is controlled by timer/counter control register 1 (TC7CR1), timer/counter control register 2 (TC7CR2), timer/counter control register 3 (TC7CR3), 10-bit dead time 1 setup register (TC7DRA), pulse width 1 setup register (TC7DRB), period setup register (TC7DRC), dead time 2 setup register (TC7DRD), pulse width 2 setup register (TC7DRE), and two capture value registers (TC7CAPA and TC7CAPB).
Timer/Counter 7 Control Register 1
TC7CR1 (0029H) 7 TRGAM 6 TRGSEL 5 PPG2INI 4 PPG1INI 3 NCRSEL 2 1 TC7CK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 73
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.2 Control TMP86FH12MG
TC7CK
Select a source clock (Supplied to the up counter).
00: fc 01: fc/2 10 fc/22
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz]
11: fc/23 [Hz] Select the duration of noise elimination for TC7 input (after passing through the flip-flop). Specify the initial value of PPG1 output. Specify the initial value of PPG2 output. 00: Eliminate pulses shorter than 16/fc [s] as noise. 01: Eliminate pulses shorter than 8/fc [s] as noise. 10: Eliminate pulses shorter than 4/fc [s] as noise. 11: Do not eliminate noise. (Note) 0: Low (Positive logic) 1: High (Negative logic) 0: Low (Positive logic) 1: High (Negative logic)
NCRSEL
PPG1INI
Select positive or negative logic.
R/W
PPG2INI
0: Start on trigger falling edge. TRGSEL Select a trigger start edge. 1: Start on trigger rising edge. 0: Always accept trigger edges. 1: Do not accept trigger edges during active output.
TRGAM
Trigger edge acceptance mode
Note: Due to the circuit configuration, a pulse shorter than 1/fc may be eliminated as noise or accepted as a trigger.
Timer/Counter 7 Control Register 2
TC7CR2 (002AH) 7 EMGR 6 EMGIE 5 PPG2OE 4 PPG1OE 3 CSTC 2 1 TC7OUT 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TC7OUT
Select an output waveform mode.
00: PPG1/PPG2 independent output 01: - 10: Output with variable duty ratio 11: Output with 50% duty ratio 00: Command start and capture mode 01: Command start and trigger start mode. 10: Trigger start mode 11: 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable input. 1: Enable input. 0: 1: Cancel the emergency output stop state. (Upon canceling the state, this bit is automatically cleared to 0.) R/W
CSTC
Select a count start mode.
PPG1OE PPG2OE EMGIE
Enable/disable PPG1 output. Enable/disable PPG2 output. Enable/disable input on the EMG pin.
EMGR
Cancel the emergency output stop state.
Timer/Counter 7 Control Register 3
TC7CR3 (002BH) 7 6 5 EMGF 4 CNTBF 3 CSIDIS 2 STM 1 0 TC7ST (Initial value: **00 0000)
Page 74
TMP86FH12MG
TC7ST
Start/stop the timer.
0: Stop 1: Start TC7ST = 0 00: Immediately stop and clear the counter with the output initialized. TC7ST = 1 Continuous output Continuous output One-time output -
STM
Select the state when stopped. Select continuous or one-time output.
01: Immediately stop and clear the counter with the output maintained. 10: Stop the counter after completing output in the current period. 11: -
R/W
CSIDIS
Disable the first interrupt at upon a command start.
0: Allow a periodic interrupt (INTTC7P) to occur in the first period upon a command start. 1: Do not allow a periodic interrupt (INTTC7P) to occur in the first period upon a command start. 0: Counting stopped 1: Counting in progress 0: Operating normally 1: Output stopped in emergency
CNTBF EMGF
Counting status flag Emergency output stop flag
Read only
Note 1: The TC7CR1 and TC7CR2 registers should not be rewritten after a timer start (when TC7ST, bit0 of the TC7CR3, is set to 1). Note 2: Before attempting to modify the TC7CR1 or TC7CR2, clear TC7ST and then check that CNTBF = 0 to determine that the timer is stopped. Note 3: The TC7ST bit only causes the timer to start or stop; it does not indicate the current operating state of the counter. Its value does not change automatically when counting starts or stops Note 4: In command start and capture mode or command start and trigger start mode, writing 1 to TC7ST causes the timer to restart immediately. It means that rewriting any bit other than TC7ST in the TC7CR3 after a command start causes the rewriting of TC7ST, resulting in the timer being restarted (PPG output is started from the initial state). When TC7ST is set to 1, rewriting the TC7CR3 (Using a bit manipulation or LD instruction) clears the counter and restarts the timer. Note 5: TC7CR2 is always read as 0 even after 1 is written. Note 6: Data registers are not updated by merely modifying the output mode with TC7CR2. After modifying the output mode, reconfigure data registers TC7DRA to TC7DRE. Ensure that the data registers are written in an appropriate order because they are not enabled until the upper byte of the TC7DRC is written.
Dead Time 1 Setup Register
15 TC7DRA (0009H, 0008H) Read/Write (Initial value: **** **00 0000 0000) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC7DRAH (0009H) TC7DRAL (0008H)
Pulse Width 1 Setup Register
15 TC7DRB (000BH, 000AH) Read/Write (Initial value: **** **00 0000 0000) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC7DRBH (000BH) TC7DRBL (000AH)
Period Setup Register
15 TC7DRC (000DH, 000CH) Read/Write (Initial value: **** **00 0000 0000) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC7DRCH (000DH) TC7DRCL (000CH)
Page 75
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.2 Control TMP86FH12MG
Dead Time 2 Setup Register
15 TC7DRD (0FB1H, 0FB0H) Read/Write (Initial value: **** **00 0000 0000) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC7DRDH (0FB1H) TC7DRDL (0FB0H)
Pulse Width 2 Setup Register
15 TC7DRE (0FB3H, 0FB2H) Read/Write (Initial value: **** **00 0000 0000) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC7DREH (0FB3H) TC7DREL (0FB2H)
Note 1: Data registers TC7DRA to TC7DRE have double-stage configuration, consisting of a data register that stores data written by an instruction and a compare register to be compared with the counter. Note 2: When writing data to data registers TC7DRA to TC7DRE, first write the lower byte and then the upper byte. Note 3: Unused bits (Bits 10 to 15) in the upper bytes of data registers TC7DRA to TC7DRE are not assigned specific register functions. These bits are always read as 0 even when a 1 is written. Note 4: Values read from data registers TC7DRA to TC7DRE may differ from the actual PPG output waveforms due to their double-stage configuration. Note 5: Data registers are not updated by merely modifying the output mode with TC7CR2. After modifying the output mode, reconfigure data registers TC7DRA to TC7DRE. Ensure that the data registers are written in an appropriate order because they are not enabled until the upper byte of the TC7DRC is written.
Rising-edge Capture Value Register
15 TC7CAPA (0FB5H, 0FB4H) Read only (Initial value: 0000 00** **** ****) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC7CAPAH (0FB5H) TC7CAPAL (0FB4H)
Falling-edge Capture Value Register
15 TC7CAPB (0FB7H, 0FB6H) Read only (Initial value: 0000 00** **** ****) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC7CAPBH (0FB7H) TC7CAPBL (0FB6H)
Note 1: Capture registers (TC7CAPA and TC7CAPB) must be read in the following order: Lower byte of the TC7CAPA, upper byte of the TC7CAPA, lower byte of the TC7CAPB, upper byte of the TC7CAPB. Note 2: The next captured data is not updated by reading the TC7CAPA only. The TC7CAPB must also be read. Note 3: It is possible to read the TC7CAPB only. Read the lower byte first. Note 4: If a capture edge is not detected within a period, the previous capture value is maintained in the next period. Note 5: If more than one capture edge is detected within a period, the capture value for the edge detected last is valid in the next period. Note 6: Bits 10 to 15 of the TC7CAPA and TC7CAPB are always read as 0.
Page 76
TMP86FH12MG
9.3 Configuring Control and Data Registers
Configure control and data registers in the following order: 1. Configure mode settings: TC7CR1, TC7CR2 2. Configure data registers (Dead time, pulse width): TC7DRA, TC7DRB, TC7DRD, TC7DRE (only those required for selected mode) 3. Configure data registers (Period): TC7DRC 4. Configure timer start/stop:TC7CR3 * Data registers have double-stage configuration, consisting of a data register that stores data written by an instruction and a compare register to be compared with the counter. * Data stored in a data register is processed according to the output mode specified in the TC7OUT, transferred to the compare register, and then used for comparison with the up counter. * Data registers required for the specified output mode are used for data register processing and transfer to the compare register. Ensure that the output mode is specified in the TC7OUT (Bits 0 and 1 of the TC7CR2) before configuring data registers. * Writing data to the upper byte of the TC7DRC causes a data transfer request to be issued for data in data registers TC7DRA to TC7DRE. If a counter match or clear occurs while that request is valid, the data is transferred to the compare register and becomes valid for comparison. * If a data register is written more than once within a period, the data in the data register that was set when the upper byte of the TC7DRC was written is valid as data for the next period. The data in the data register written last in the first period will be valid for the period that follows the next period.
Execute write instruction. Execute write instruction. Execute write instruction.
TC7DRA TC7DRB TC7DRC
A1 B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3
Valid in next period
Period (1)
Period (2)
Period (3) Previous data is maintained if data is not rewritten within the period.
Period (4)
Execute write instruction.
Execute more than one data write instruction.
Execute write instruction.
No data write
Execute write instruction.
TC7DRA TC7DRB TC7DRC
A1 B1 C1
A2 C2 C3 B2 C4
A3 C5
A4 C6
A5 C7
A6 B3 C8
A7 B4 C9
Data valid in each period
A1 B1 C1
A2 B1 C2
A3 B2 C5
A5 B2 C7
A6 B3 C8 Period (5)
Period (1) If data is rewritten more than once within a period, the data written first is valid in the next period.
Period (2) If data is rewritten more than once within a period, the data written last is valid in the period following the next period.
Period (3)
Period (4)
Figure 9-2 Example Configuration of Control/data Registers (1)
Page 77
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
More than one data write
No data write
More than one data write
TC7DRA TC7DRB TC7DRC
A1 B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3
A1 B1 C1
A2 B2 C2
A3 B3 C3
A4 B4 C3
Data valid in each period
a1 b1 c1
A1 B1 C1
A3 B3 C3
A1 B1 C1
A3 B3 C3
A4 B4 C3 Period (6)
Period (1)
Period (2)
Period (3)
Period (4)
Period (5)
If TC7DRC is written in the next period
Figure 9-3 Example Configuration of Control/data Registers (2)
9.4 Features
9.4.1 Programmable pulse generator output (PPG output)
The PPG1 and PPG2 pins provide PPG outputs. The output waveform mode for PPG outputs is specified with TC7CR2 and their waveforms are controlled by comparing the contents of the 10-bit up counter with the data set in data registers (TC7DRA to TC7DRE). Three output waveform modes are available: 50% duty mode, variable duty mode, and PPG1/PPG2 independent mode.
9.4.1.1
50% duty mode
(1) Description With a period specified in the TC7DRC, the PPG1 and PPG2 pins provide waveforms having a pulse width (Active duration) that equals a half the period. The PPG1 output is active at the beginning of a period and becomes inactive at half the period. The PPG2 output is inactive at the beginning of a period, becomes active at half the period, and remains active until the end of the period. If a dead time is specified in the TC7DRA, the pulse width (Active duration) is shortened by the dead time. (2) Register settings TC7OUT = "11", TC7DRA = "dead time", TC7DRC = "period" (3) Valid range for data register values (a) Period: 002H TC7DRC 400H (Writing 400H to TC7DRC results in 000H being read from it.)
Page 78
TMP86FH12MG
When the value set in the TC7DRC is an odd number, the PPG2 pulse width is one count longer than the PPG1 pulse width. (b) Dead time TC7DRA: 000H TC7DRA < TC7DRC/2 To specify no dead time, set the TC7DRA to 000H.
Source clock
Counter
S, 0
1
M
S/2
S/2+1
S/2+M
S, 0
1
2
3
Dead time
M
M'
Period
S M: Dead time
S
PPG1 output
Active duration M: Dead time S: Period
PPG2 output
Active duration
INTTC7T
INTTC7P
Dead time (TC7DRA) Dead time (TC7DRA)
Pulse width (TC7DRC/2)
Pulse width (TC7DRC/2)
Period (TC7DRC)
Figure 9-4 Example operation in 50% duty mode: Command and capture start, positive logic, continuous output
9.4.1.2 Variable duty mode
(1) Description With a period specified in the TC7DRC and a pulse width in the TC7DRB, the PPG1 pin provides a waveform having the specified pulse width while the PPG2 pin provides a waveform having a pulse width that equals (TC7DRC - TC7DRB). The PPG1 output is active at the beginning of a period, remains active during the pulse width specified in the TC7DRB, after which it is inactive until the end of the period. The PPG2 output is inactive at the beginning of a period, remains inactive during the pulse width specified in the TC7DRB, after which it is active until the end of the period, that is, during the pulse width of (TC7DRC - TC7DRB). If a dead time is specified in the TC7DRA, the pulse width (Active duration) is shortened by the dead time.
(2)
Register settings TC7OUT = "10", TC7DRA = "dead time", TC7DRB = "pulse width", TC7DRC = "period" Page 79
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
(3)
Valid range for data register values (a) Period: 002H TC7DRB + TC7DRA < TC7DRC 400H (Writing 400H to TC7DRC results in 000H being read from it.) (b) Pulse width: 001H TC7DRB < TC7DRC (c) Dead time: 000H TC7DRA < TC7DRB, 000H TC7DRA < (TC7DRC - TC7DRB) (To specify no dead time, set the TC7DRA to 000H.)
Source clock
Counter
S, 0
1
M
N N+1
N+M
S, 0
1
2
3
Dead time
M
M'
Pulse width
N
N'
Period
S
M: Dead time Active duration N: Pulse width S: Period M: Dead time
S
PPG1 output
PPG2 output
Active duration
INTTC7T
INTTC7P
Dead time (TC7DRA) Pulse width (TC7DRB) Dead time (TC7DRA) Pulse width (TC7DRC - TC7DRB) Period (TC7DRC)
Figure 9-5 Example Operation in Variable Duty Mode: Command and Capture Start, Positive Logic, Continuous Output
9.4.1.3 PPG1/PPG2 independent mode
(1) Description For the PPG1 output, specify the dead time in the TC7DRA and pulse width in the TC7DRB. For the PPG2 output, specify the dead time in the TC7DRD and pulse width in the TC7DRE. With a common period specified in the TC7DRC, the PPG1 and PPG2 pins provide waveforms having the specified pulse widths. Page 80
TMP86FH12MG
The PPG1 output is active at the beginning of a period, remains active during the pulse width specified in the TC7DRB, after which it is inactive until the end of the period. The PPG2 output is active at the beginning of a period, remains active during the pulse width specified in the TC7DRE, after which it is inactive until the end of the period. If a dead time is specified in the TC7DRA for the PPG1 output or in the TC7DRD for the PPG2 output, the pulse width (Active duration) is shortened by the dead time. (2) Register settings TC7OUT = "00", TC7DRC = "period" TC7DRA = "PPG1 dead time", TC7DRB = "PPG1 pulse width" TC7DRD = "PPG2 dead time", TC7DRE = "PPG2 pulse width" (3) Valid range for data register values (a) Period: 002H TC7DRC 400H (Writing 400H to TC7DRC results in 000H being read from it.) (b) Pulse width: 001H TC7DRB 400H (Writing 400H to TC7DRB results in 000H being read from it.) 001H TC7DRE 400H (Writing 400H to TC7DRE results in 000H being read from it.) (c) Dead time: 000H TC7DRA 3FFH, where TC7DRA < TC7DRB TC7DRC 000H TC7DRD 3FFH, where TC7DRD < TC7DRE TC7DRC (To specify no dead time, write 000H.)
* Settings for a duty ratio of 0% 002H TC7DRC TC7DRA 3FFH (PPG1 output) 002H TC7DRC TC7DRD 3FFH (PPG2 output) * Settings for a duty ratio greater than 0%, up to 100% 000H TC7DRA < TC7DRB TC7DRC 400H (PPG1 output) 000H TC7DRD < TC7DRE TC7DRC 400H (PPG2 output)
Period
Period
0% duty
100% duty
Page 81
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
Source clock
Counter
0
1
M
T
N
U
S, 0
1
2
3
Dead time
M
M'
Pulse width
N
N'
Period
S
S
Dead time
T
T'
Pulse width
U
M: Dead time Active duration N: Pulse width
U'
PPG1 output
PPG2 output
T: Dead time U: Pulse width
Active duration
INTTC7T
S: Period
INTTC7P
PPG1 dead time (TC7DRA) PPG1 pulse width (TC7DRB) PPG2 dead time (TC7DRD) PPG2 pulse width (TC7DRE) Period (TC7DRC)
Figure 9-6 Example Operation in PPG1/PPG2 Independent Mode: Command and Capture Start, Positive Logic, Continuous Output 9.4.2 Starting a count
A count can be started by using a command or TC7 pin input.
9.4.2.1
Command start and capture mode
(1) Description Writing a 1 to TC7ST causes the current count to be cleared and the counter to start counting. Once the count has reached a specified period, the counter is cleared. The counter subsequently restarts counting if STM specifies continuous mode; it stops counting if STM specifies one-time mode. Writing a 1 to TC7ST before the count reaches a period causes the counter to be cleared, after which it operates as specified with STM. The count values at the rising and falling edges on the TC7 pin can be stored in capture registers (Details for the capture are given in a separate section).
Page 82
TMP86FH12MG
(2)
Register settings CSTC = "00": Command start and capture mode STM: Continuous/one-time output TC7ST = "1": Starts counting
PPG1 Count start (Command) Count cleared Start Count cleared Start
TC7ST = 1
Count cleared Restart
PPG output with a period specified with TC7DRC
PPG output with a period specified with TC7DRC
PPG output with a period specified with TC7DRC
Figure 9-7 Example Operation in Command Start and Capture Mode
9.4.2.2 Command start and trigger start mode
(1) Description Writing a 1 to TC7ST causes the current count to be cleared and the counter to start counting. The operation is the same as that in command start and capture mode if there is no trigger input on the TC7 pin. If an edge specified with the start edge selection field (TRGSEL) appears on the TC7 pin, however, the timer starts counting. The counter is cleared and stopped while the TC7 pin is driven to the specified clear/stop level. If the TC7 pin is at the clear/stop level when a count start command is issued (1 is written to TC7ST), counting does not start (INTTC7P does not occur) until a trigger start edge appears, causing INTTC7T to occur (A trigger input takes precedence over a command start).
Note: For more information on the acceptance of a trigger, see 9.4.2.5 "Trigger start/stop acceptance mode".
(2)
Register settings CSTC = "01": Command start and trigger start mode STM: Continuous/one-time output TC7ST = "1": Starts counting TRGSEL: Trigger selection
Count stopped
Period (TC7DRC) TC7 input (Signal after noise elimination) PPG1 Count start (Command) PPG output with a period When TRGSEL = 0 (Start on falling edge) specified with TC7DRC if there is no trigger Count cleared Start
Count cleared
Count start Count starts with a trigger (Falling edge).
Count stops with a trigger (High level).
Figure 9-8 Example Operation in Command Start and Trigger Start Mode
Page 83
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
9.4.2.3
Trigger start mode
(1) Description If an edge specified with the start edge selection field (TRGSEL) appears on the TC7 pin, the timer starts counting. The counter is cleared and stopped while the TC7 pin is driven to the specified clear/ stop level. In trigger start mode, writing a 1 to TC7ST is ignored and does not initialize the PPG output.
Note: For more information on the acceptance of a trigger, see 9.4.2.5 "Trigger start/stop acceptance mode".
(2)
Register settings CSTC = "10": Trigger start mode STM: Continuous/one-time output TC7ST = "1": Starts waiting for a trigger on the TC7 pin TRGSEL: Trigger selection
TC7 input (Signal after noise elimination) PPG1 output (Example) Command set After a command is set, counting does not start until a specified trigger appears. Count start
Count stopped
Count stopped
Count cleared
Count start
Count cleared
TC7 input (Signal after noise elimination) PPG1 output (Example) Command set After a command is set, counting does not start until a specified trigger appears. Count start
Count stopped
Count cleared
Count start
Figure 9-9 Example Operation in Trigger Start Mode
9.4.2.4 Trigger capture mode (CSTC = 00)
(1) Description When counting starts in command start and capture mode, the count values at the rising and falling edges of the TC7 pin input are captured and stored in capture registers TC7CAPA and TC7CAPB, respectively.
Page 84
TMP86FH12MG
The captured data is first stored in the capture buffer. At the end of the period, the data is transferred from the capture buffer to the capture register. If a trigger input does not appear within a period, the data captured in the previous period remains in the capture buffer and is transferred to the capture register at the end of the period. If more than one trigger edge is detected within a period, the data captured last is written to the capture register. Captured data must be read in the following order: Lower byte of capture register A (TC7CAPAL), upper byte of capture register A (TC7CAPAH), lower byte of capture register B (TC7CAPBL), and upper byte of capture register B (TC7CAPBH). Note that reading only the rising-edge captured data (TC7CAPA) does not update the next captured data. The falling-edge captured data (TC7CAPB) must also be read. An attempt to read a captured value from a register other than the upper byte of the TC7CAPB causes the capture registers to enter protected state, in which captured data cannot be updated. Reading a value from the upper byte of the TC7CAPB cancels that state, re-enabling the updating of captured data (The TC7CAPA and TC7CAPB are read as a single set of operation). Note that the protected state may be still effective immediately after the counter starts. Ensure that a dummy read of capture registers is performed in the first period to cancel the protected state. The capture feature of the TC7 assumes that a capture trigger (Rising or falling edge) appears within a period. Captured data is updated (An edge is detected) only when the timer is operating (TC7ST = 1). If a timer stop command (TC7ST = 0) is written within a period, captured data will be undefined. Captured data is not updated after a one-time stop command is written. In one-time stop mode, no trigger is accepted after a STOP command is given. (2) Register settings CSTC = "00": Command start and capture mode STM: Continuous/one-time output TC7ST = "1": Starts counting
Page 85
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
1 period Rising edge TC7 input (Signal after noise elimination) Falling edge Rising edge
1 period Falling edge
a
b
c
d
a
Capture buffers
c
b
d
x
Capture registers
a
c
y
b
d
Captured values read (Data read skipped)
Captured values read (a and b read)
Captured values read (c and d read)
1 period TC7 input (Signal after noise elimination)
1 period
1 period
1 period
a
b
c
d
a1
b1
c1
a2
c2
a
Capture buffers
c
a1
c1
c2
b
d
b1
a2
x
Capture registers
c
a1
c1
c2
y
d
d
Started reading other than upper CAPB in this period
b1
a2
Captured values read (Data read skipped)
Captured values read (c and d read)
Captured values read (a1 and d read)
Figure 9-10 Example Operation in Trigger Capture Mode
9.4.2.5 Trigger start/stop acceptance mode
(1) Selecting an input signal logic for the TC7 pin (Trigger input) The logic for an input trigger signal on the TC7 pin can be specified using TC7CR1 . * TRGSEL = 0: Counting starts on the falling edge. The counter is cleared and stopped while the TC7 pin is high. * TRGSEL = 1: Counting starts on the rising edge. The counter is cleared and stopped while the TC7 pin is low.
Page 86
TMP86FH12MG
TRGSEL = 0 Counter operating Counter stopped Counter operating
TRGSEL = 1 Counter operating Counter stopped Counter operating
TC7 pin input
TC7 pin input
Count started
Count cleared
Count started
Count started
Count cleared
Count started
Figure 9-11 Trigger Input Signal
When TRGSEL is set to 0 to select a falling-edge trigger, a falling edge detected on the TC7 pin causes the counter to start counting and a high level on the TC7 pin causes the counter to be cleared and the PPG output to be initialized. The counter is stopped while the TC7 pin input is high. When TRGSEL is set to 1 to select a rising-edge trigger, a rising edge detected on the TC7 pin causes the counter to start counting and a low level on the TC7 pin causes the counter to be cleared and the PPG output to be initialized. The counter is stopped while the TC7 pin input is low. In one-time stop mode, the counter accepts a stop trigger but does not accept a start trigger (when a stop trigger is accepted within a period, the output is immediately initialized and the counter is stopped).
Counter stopped
TC7 pin input
PPG output Counting stop mode with the outputs at the end of the period
Initial value
One-time mode Count cleared
All triggers (Start and stop) are ignored when the timer is stopped (TC7ST = 0). (2) Specifying whether triggers are always accepted or ignored when PPG outputs are active The TC7CR1 specifies whether triggers from the TC7 pin are always accepted or ignored when the PPG output is active. * TRGAM = 0: Triggers from the TC7 pin are always accepted regardless of whether PPG1 and PPG2 outputs are active or inactive. A trigger starts or clears/stops the timer and deactivates PPG1 and PPG2 outputs. * TRGAM = 1: Triggers from the TC7 pin are accepted only when PPG1 and PPG2 outputs are inactive. A trigger starts or clears/stops the timer. Triggers are ignored when PPG1 and PPG2 outputs are active. The active/inactive state of the PPG1 or PPG2 pin has meaning only when output on the pin is enabled with PPG1OE or PPG2OE.
Page 87
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
TC7 pin input
PPG1 output (Positive logic) PPG2 output (Positive logic)
INTTC7T
INTTC7P Counter operating
Count started
Counter stopped
Count cleared Count started
Counter operating
Counter stopped
Count cleared
Counter Counter operating stopped Count cleared Count started
Counter operating
End of a period
Count started
Figure 9-12 Start and Clear/stop Triggers on the TC7 Pin: Falling-edge Trigger (Counting stopped at high level), Triggers Always Accepted
(3) Ignoring triggers when PPG outputs are active Setting TRGAM to 1 specifies that triggers are ignored when PPG outputs are active; trigger edges detected when PPG1 and PPG2 outputs are inactive are accepted and cause the counter to be cleared and stopped. If a trigger is detected when PPG1 and PPG2 outputs are active, the counter does not stop immediately but continues counting until the outputs become inactive. If the trigger signal level is a stop level when the outputs become inactive, the counter is cleared/stopped and waits for a next start trigger. If output is enabled for both PPG1 and PPG2, triggers are accepted only when both PPG1 and PPG2 outputs are inactive.
Triggers not accepted
TC7 pin input (Signal after noise elimination) IGBT1 (Positive logic) IGBT2 (Positive logic)
INTTC7
INTTCR
Counter operating Counter stopped Counter operating Counter stopped Counter operating
A trigger detected when PPG1 and PPG2 are inactive causes the counter to stop or start.
A trigger detected when PPG1 or PPG2 is active does not cause the counter to stop.
A high level of the trigger input causes the counter to stop when PPG1 and PPG2 become inactive.
A trigger detected when PPG1 or PPG2 is active does not cause the counter to stop or restart.
Figure 9-13 Start Triggers on the TC7 Pin: Falling-edge Trigger (Counting stopped at high level), Triggers Ignored when PPG Outputs are Active
Page 88
TMP86FH12MG
9.4.3
Configuring how the timer stops
Setting TC7ST to 0 causes the timer to stop with the specified output state according to the setting of STM.
9.4.3.1
Counting stopped with the outputs initialized
When STM is set to 00, the counter stops immediately with the PPG1 and PPG2 outputs initialized to the values specified with PPG1INI and PPG2INI.
9.4.3.2
Counting stopped with the outputs maintained
When STM is set to 01, the counter stops immediately with the current PPG1 and PPG2 output states maintained. To restart the counter from the maintained state (STM = 01), set TC7ST to 1. The counter is restarted with the initial output values, specified with PPG1INI and PPG2INI.
9.4.3.3
Counting stopped with the outputs initialized at the end of the period
When STM is set to 10, the counter continues counting until the end of the current period and then stops. If a stop trigger is detected before the end of the period, however, the counter stops immediately. TC7CR1 and TC7CR2 must not be rewritten before the counter stops completely. The CNTBF flag (TC7CR3) can be read to determine whether the counter has stopped.
9.4.4
One-time/continuous output mode
One-time output mode
Starting the timer (TC7ST = 1) with STM set to 10 specifies one-time output mode. In this mode, the timer stops counting at the end of a period. For a trigger start, the counter is stopped until a trigger is detected. A specified trigger restarts counting and the counter stops at the end of the period or when a stop trigger is detected, after which it waits for a trigger again. For a command start, the counter is stopped until TC7ST is reset to 1. TC7CR1 and TC7CR2 must not be rewritten before the counter stops completely. The CNTBF flag (TC7CR3) can be read to determine whether the counter has stopped. TC7ST remains set to 1 after the counter is stopped. When TC7ST is set to 1, setting STM to 10 clears the counter, which then restarts counting from the beginning in one-time output mode.
9.4.4.1
9.4.4.2
Continuous output mode
Starting the timer (TC7ST = 1) with STM set to 00 or 01 specifies continuous output mode. In this mode, the timer outputs specified waveforms continuously.
Page 89
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
PPG1 (Positive logic) PPG1INI = 0 PPG2 (Negative logic) PPG1INI = 1
The counter is forcibly stopped and cleared, with the outputs initialized. STOP command TC7ST = 0
Output enabled Count started PPG1E/PPG2E = 1 TC7ST = 1 STM = 00
Figure 9-14 Immediately Stopping and Clearing the Counter with the Outputs Initialized (STM = 00)
PPG1 (Positive logic) PPG1INI = 0 PPG2 (Negative logic) PPG1INI = 1 The counter is forcibly stopped and cleared, with the outputs maintained.
Output enabled Count started PPG1E/PPG2E = 1 TC7ST = 1 STM = 01
STOP command TC7ST = 0
Figure 9-15 Immediately Stopping and Clearing the Counter with the Outputs Maintained (STM = 01)
1 period PPG1 (Positive logic) PPG1INI = 0 PPG2 (Negative logic) PPG1INI = 1
1 period
After a stop command is executed, the counter continues counting until the end of the period. It stops at the end of the period. STOP command Count TC7ST = 0 stopped STM = 10
Output enabled Count started PPG1E/PPG2E = 1 TC7ST = 1 STM = 00 or 01
Figure 9-16 Stopping the Counter at the End of the Period (STM = 10)
1 period PPG1 (Positive logic) PPG1INI = 0 PPG2 (Negative logic) PPG1INI = 1 The counter stops at the end of the period and then waits for a command start or a start trigger. Output enabled PPG1E/PPG2E = 1 Count started TC7ST = 1 STM = 10 Count stopped at the end of the period
Figure 9-17 Stopping the Counter at the End of the Period (STM = 10): TC7ST = 1, One-time Output Mode
Page 90
TMP86FH12MG
9.4.5
PPG output control (Initial value/output logic, enabling/disabling output)
Specifying initial values and output logic for PPG outputs
The PPG1INI and PPG2INI bits (TC7CR1 and TC7CR1) specify the initial values of PPG1 and PPG2 outputs as well as their output logic. (1) Positive logic output Setting the bit to 0 specifies that the output is initially low and driven high upon a match between the counter value and specified dead time. (2) Negative logic output Setting the bit to 1 specifies that the output is initially high and driven low upon a match between the counter value and specified dead time.
9.4.5.1
9.4.5.2
Enabling or disabling PPG outputs
The PPG1OE and PPG2OE bits (TC7CR2 and TC7CR2) specify whether PPG outputs are enabled or disabled. When outputs are disabled, no PPG waveforms appear while the counter is operating, allowing the PPG1 and PPG2 pins to be used as normal input/output pins. The states of the pins when outputs are disabled depend on the settings in port registers.
9.4.5.3
Using the TC7 as a normal timer/counter
The TC7 can be used as a normal timer/counter when PPG outputs are disabled using PPG1E and PPG2E. In that case, use an INTTC7P interrupt, which occurs upon a match with the value specified in the data register (TC7DRC). To start the counter, use start control (TC7S) in command start and capture mode.
Start Source clock
Counter
0
1
2
3
4
N/0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TC7DRC
n Match detected
INTTC7P
Figure 9-18 Using the TC7 as a Normal Timer/Counter 9.4.6 Eliminating noise from the TC7 pin input
A digital noise canceller eliminates noise from the input signal on the TC7 pin. The digital noise canceller uses a sampling clock of fc/4, fc/2 or fc, as specified with NCRSEL, and samples the signal five times. It accepts a level input which is continuous at least over the period of time required for five samplings. Any level input which does not continue over the period of time required for five samplings is canceled as noise.
Page 91
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
Table 9-1 Noise Canceller Settings
NCRSEL 00 01 10 11 Sampling Frequency (Number of Samplings) fc/4 (5) fc/2 (5) fc (5) (None) Pulse Width Always Assumed as Noise At 8 MHz 16/fc [s] 8/fc [s] 4/fc [s] None 2 [ms] 1 [ms] 0.5 [ms] - At 16 MHz 1 [ms] 500 [ns] 250 [ns] - 20/fc [s] 10/fc [s] 5/fc [s] (1/fc) Pulse Width Always Assumed as Signal At 8 MHz 2.5 [ms] 1.25 [ms] 0.625 [ms] At 16 MHz 1.25 [ms] 0.625 [ms] 0.3125 [ms]
TC7 input
F/F
fc fc/4 fc/2 fc
Noise canceller
Sampling clock
B A S
Z
Edge detection
PPG output control circuit
PPG output
A B C
Z
NCRSEL = 11
NCRSEL
12345 fc 1 fc/2 1 fc/4
TC7 pin input (after passing through F/F)
When NCRSEL = 00 Pulses of 16/fc or shorter are canceled.
12345
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
Pulses of 20/fc or longer are assumed as a signal. Pulses of 10/fc or longer are assumed as a signal.
After noise elimination
When NCRSEL = 01
Pulses of 8/fc or shorter are canceled.
When NCRSEL = 10 Pulses of 4/fc or shorter are canceled.
Pulses of 5/fc or longer are assumed as a signal.
Figure 9-19 Noise Canceller Operation
* When NCRSEL = 00, a TC7 input level after passing through the F/F is always canceled if its duration is 16/fc [s] or less and always assumed as a signal if its duration is 20/fc [s] or greater. After the input signal supplied on the TC7 pin passes through the F/F, there is a delay between 21/fc [s] and 24/fc [s] before the PPG outputs vary. * When NCRSEL = 01, a TC7 input level after passing through the F/F is always canceled if its duration is 8/fc [s] or less and always assumed as a signal if its duration is 10/fc [s] or greater. After the input signal supplied on the TC7 pin passes through the F/F, there is a delay between 13/fc [s] and 14/fc [s] before the PPG outputs vary. * When NCRSEL = 10, a TC7 input level after passing through the F/F is always canceled if its duration is 4/fc [s] or less and always assumed as a signal if its duration is 5/fc [s] or greater. After the input signal supplied on the TC7 pin passes through the F/F, there is a delay of 5/fc [s] before the PPG outputs vary. * When NCRSEL = 11, a pulse shorter than 1/fc may be assumed as a signal or canceled as noise in the first-stage F/F. Ensure that input signal pulses are longer than 1/fc. After the input signal supplied on the TC7 pin passes through the F/F, there is a delay of 4/fc [s] before the PPG outputs vary.
Page 92
TMP86FH12MG
Note 1: If the pin input level changes while the specified noise elimination threshold is being modified, the noise canceller may assume noise as a pulse or cancel a pulse as noise. Note 2: If noise occurs in synchronization with the internal sampling timing consecutively, it may be assumed as a signal. Note 3: The signal supplied on the TC7 pin requires 1/fc [s] or less to pass through the F/F.
9.4.7
Interrupts
The TC7 supports three interrupt sources.
9.4.7.1
INTTC7T (Trigger start interrupt)
A trigger interrupt (INTTC7T) occurs when the counter starts upon the detection of a trigger edge specified with TC7CR1. This interrupt does not occur with a trigger edge for clearing the count. A trigger edge detected in trigger capture mode does not cause an interrupt. A start trigger causes an interrupt even when the counter is stopped in emergency.
1 period
TC7 trigger
Cleared
Count started
Cleared
Counter
x
0
1
2
M-2
M-1
0
1
2
0
1
2
INTTC7T
Cleared upon match TC7DRC
INTTC7P
PPG output
Figure 9-20 Trigger Start Interrupt
9.4.7.2 INTTC7P (Period interrupt)
A period interrupt (INTTC7P) occurs when the counter starts with a command and when the counter is cleared with the specified counter period (TC7DRC) reached, that is, at the end of a period. A match with the set period causes an interrupt even when the counter is stopped in emergency.
Command stop Stop at the end of period Timer stopped Counter x 1 2 M-2 M-1 M, 0 1 2 M-2 M-1 M, 0
Command start
INTTC7T
Clear upon match TC7DRC
INTTC7P
PPG output CSIDIS specifies whether the first INTTC7P occurs. 1 period 1 period
Figure 9-21 Period Interrupt
Page 93
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
If a command start is specified (1 is written in TC7ST) when the TC7 pin is at a stop level, the counter does not start (INTTC7P does not occur); a subsequent trigger start edge causes the counter to start and INTTC7T to occur.
9.4.7.3
INTEMG (Emergency output stop interrupt)
An emergency output stop interrupt (INTEMG) occurs when the emergency output stop circuit operates to stop PPG outputs in emergency.
9.4.8
Emergency PPG output stop feature
Setting TC7CR2 to 1 enables the emergency PPG output stop feature (Enables the EMG pin input). A low level input detected on the EMG pin causes an EMG interrupt (INTEMG) to occur with the PPG waveforms initialized (as specified with PPG1INI and PPG2INI). (Emergency PPG output stop) This feature only disables PPG outputs without stopping the counter. Use the EMG interrupt handler routine to stop the timer.
Note:Ensure that a low level on the EMG pin continues for at least 4/fc [s]. The emergency PPG output stop feature may not operate normally with a low level shorter than 4/fc [s].
EMG interrupt (INTEMG) EMG pin
Sampling circuit
S R
Q
F/F
EMGF (Status flag) Port output latch
F/F F/F
A B S
Z
PPG1OE PPG2OE EMGIE EMGR TC7 control register 2
PPG circuit output TC7ST STM TC7 control register 3
PPG1 PPG2
PPG1INI PPG1OE PPG2INI PPG2OE TC7 control register 1
Figure 9-22 EMG Pin
9.4.8.1 Enabling/disabling input on the EMG pin
Setting TC7CR2 to 1 enables input on the EMG pin and setting the bit to 0 disables input on the pin. (Initially, EMGIE is set to 0, disabling an emergency output stop (EMG pin) input.) The input signal on the EMG pin is valid only when its shared port pin is placed in input mode. Ensure that the shared port pin is placed in input mode before attempting to enable the EMG pin input. The EMG pin input is sampled using a high-frequency clock. The emergency PPG output stop feature does not operate normally if the high-frequency clock is stopped.
9.4.8.2
Monitoring the emergency PPG output stop state
When the emergency PPG output stop feature activates, the TC7CR3 is set to 1. 1 read from EMGF indicates that PPG outputs are disabled by the emergency PPG output stop feature. To restart the timer in that state, first make necessary settings for stopping the timer before canceling the emergency PPG output stop state (by writing 1 to EMGR, bit7 of the TC7CR2) and then reconfiguring the control and data registers to restart the timer.
Page 94
TMP86FH12MG
9.4.8.3
EMG interrupt
An EMG interrupt (INTEMG) occurs when an emergency PPG output stop input is accepted. To use an INTEMG interrupt for some processing, ensure that the interrupt is enabled beforehand. When the EMG pin is low with EMGIE set to 1 (EMG pin input enabled), an attempt to cancel the emergency PPG output stop state results in an interrupt being generated again, with the emergency PPG output stop state reestablished. An INTEMG interrupt occurs whenever a stop input is accepted when EMGIE = 1, regardless of whether the timer is operating.
9.4.8.4
Canceling the emergency PPG output stop state
To cancel the emergency PPG output stop state, ensure that the input on the EMG pin is high, set TC7CR3 to 0 and TC7CR3 to 00 to stop the timer, and then set TC7CR2 to 1. Setting EMGR to 1 cancels the stop state only when TC7ST = 0 and STM = 00; ensure that TC7ST = 0 and STM = 00 before setting EMGR to 1. If the input on the EMG pin is low and EMGIE = 1 when the emergency PPG output stop state is canceled, the timer re-enters the emergency PPG output stop state and an INTEMG interrupt occurs.
9.4.8.5
Restarting the timer after canceling the emergency PPG output stop state
To restart the timer after canceling the emergency PPG output stop state, reconfigure the control registers (TC7CR1, TC7CR2, TC7CR3) before restarting the timer. The timer cannot restart in the emergency PPG output stop state. Monitor the emergency PPG output stop state and cancel the state before reconfiguring the control registers to restart the timer. Ensure that the control registers are reconfigured according to the appropriate procedure for configuring timer operation control.
9.4.8.6
Response time between EMG pin input and PPG outputs being initialized
The time between a low level input being detected on the EMG pin and the PPG outputs being initialized is up to 10/fc [s].
Page 95
9. 10-Bit Timer/Counter (TC7)
9.4 Features TMP86FH12MG
Emergency stop input
10/fc [s] 1.25 s (at 8 MHz)
Output initialized forcibly
PPG pin output
Share port in input mode EMGR = 1, protection feature enabled
Initial output state
EMG pin input
Emergency stop input
EMGIE EMGF (State monitor) EMG interrupt
EMGF = 1, emergency output stop state INTEMG (EMG interrupt)
EMGR = 1, cancel emergency output stop state
TC7ST
TC7ST = 1, timer operating STM = 01, timer operating (Continuous mode)
TG7ST = 0
Specified with an instruction
STM
STM = 00 Emergency output stop state
Figure 9-23 Timing between EMG Pin Input being Detected and PPG Outputs being Disabled 9.4.9 TC7 operation and microcontroller operating mode
The TC7 operates when the microcontroller is placed in NORMAL1, NORMAL2, IDLE1, or IDLE2 mode. If the mode changes from NORMAL or IDLE to STOP, SLOW, or SLEEP while the TC7 is operating, the TC7 is initialized and stops operating. To change the microcontroller operating mode from NORMAL or IDLE to STOP, SLOW, or SLEEP, ensure that the TC7 timer is stopped before attempting to execute a mode change instruction. To change the mode from STOP, SLOW, or SLEEP to NORMAL to restart the TC7, reconfigure all registers according to the appropriate TC7 operation procedure.
Page 96
MCAP1
S INTTC1 interript
A
TC1S
Y
10.1 Configuration
B Start MPPG1 TC1S clear Clear PPG output mode
2
Decoder Set Q
Command start
Pulse width measurement mode
External trigger
External trigger start
Rising
Falling
Edge detector
METT1
TC1 Clear Y Source clock Match CMP 16-bit up-counter
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
Port (Note)
D
Figure 10-1 TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
Pulse width measurement mode S Toggle Q Clear Selector S Q Set Capture TC1DRB TC1DRA 16-bit timer register A, B Toggle Enable Set Clear PPG output mode Internal reset Write to TC1CR TFF1
Page 97
fc/211, fs/23
A
B
fc/27
B
Y
A
fc/23
C
S
2
Window mode Port (Note) pin
ACAP1
TC1CK
TC1CR
TC1 control register
TMP86FH12MG
Note: Function I/O may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.2 TimerCounter Control TMP86FH12MG
10.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 1 is controlled by the TimerCounter 1 control register (TC1CR) and two 16-bit timer registers (TC1DRA and TC1DRB). Timer Register
15 TC1DRA (0011H, 0010H) TC1DRB (0013H, 0012H) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC1DRAH (0011H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC1DRBH (0013H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC1DRAL (0010H) Read/Write TC1DRBL (0012H) Read/Write (Write enabled only in the PPG output mode)
TimerCounter 1 Control Register
7 TC1CR (0014H) 6 ACAP1 MCAP1 METT1 MPPG1 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF1
TC1S
TC1CK
TC1M
TFF1 ACAP1 MCAP1 METT1 MPPG1
Timer F/F1 control Auto capture control Pulse width measurement mode control External trigger timer mode control PPG output control
0: Clear 0:Auto-capture disable 0:Double edge capture 0:Trigger start 0:Continuous pulse generation Timer 00: Stop and counter clear 01: Command start 10: Rising edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Rising edge count (Event) Positive logic count (Window) 11: Falling edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Falling edge count (Event) Negative logic count (Window) O O
1: Set 1:Auto-capture enable 1:Single edge capture
R/W
R/W 1:Trigger start and stop 1:One-shot Extrigger O - Event O - Window O - Pulse O - PPG O O
TC1S
TC1 start control
-
O
O
O
O
O
R/W
-
O
O
O
O
O
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 TC1CK TC1 source clock select [Hz] 00 01 10 11 TC1 operating mode select fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 External clock (TC1 pin input)
Divider
SLOW, SLEEP mode fs/23 - - R/W
DV9 DV5 DV1
TC1M
00: Timer/external trigger timer/event counter mode 01: Window mode 10: Pulse width measurement mode 11: PPG (Programmable pulse generate) output mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: The timer register consists of two shift registers. A value set in the timer register becomes valid at the rising edge of the first source clock pulse that occurs after the upper byte (TC1DRAH and TC1DRBH) is written. Therefore, write the lower byte and the upper byte in this order (it is recommended to write the register with a 16-bit access instruction). Writing only the lower byte (TC1DRAL and TC1DRBL) does not enable the setting of the timer register. Note 3: To set the mode, source clock, PPG output control and timer F/F control, write to TC1CR1 during TC1S=00. Set the timer F/F1 control until the first timer start after setting the PPG mode.
Page 98
TMP86FH12MG
Note 4: Auto-capture can be used only in the timer, event counter, and window modes. Note 5: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC1DRA > TC1DRB > 1 (PPG output mode), TC1DRA > 1 (other modes) Note 6: Set TFF1 to "0" in the mode except PPG output mode. Note 7: Set TC1DRB after setting TC1M to the PPG output mode. Note 8: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC1S) is cleared to "00" automatically, and the timer stops. After the STOP mode is exited, set the TC1S to use the timer counter again. Note 9: Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Note 10:Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Page 99
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
10.3 Function
TimerCounter 1 has six types of operating modes: timer, external trigger timer, event counter, window, pulse width measurement, programmable pulse generator output modes.
10.3.1 Timer mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register 1A (TC1DRA) value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Setting TC1CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into the timer register 1B (TC1DRB) with the auto-capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time. Table 10-1 Internal Source Clock for TimerCounter 1 (Example: fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode TC1CK DV7CK = 0 Resolution [s] 00 01 10 128 8.0 0.5 Maximum Time Setting [s] 8.39 0.524 32.77 m Resolution [s] 244.14 8.0 0.5 DV7CK = 1 Maximum Time Setting [s] 16.0 0.524 32.77 m Resolution [s] 244.14 - - Maximum Time Setting [s] 16.0 - - SLOW, SLEEP mode
Example 1 :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/211 [Hz] and generating an interrupt 1 second later (fc = 16 MHz, TBTCR = "0")
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00000000B (TC1CR), 00010000B (EIRL). 7 (TC1DRA), 1E84H ; Sets the timer register (1 s / 211/fc = 1E84H) ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1
Example 2 :Auto-capture
LD : LD (TC1CR), 01010000B : WA, (TC1DRB) ; Reads the capture value ; ACAP1 1
Note: Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Page 100
TMP86FH12MG
Timer start Source clock Counter TC1DRA
0 ? 1 2 3 4 n-1 n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
n
INTTC1 interruput request
Match detect (a) Timer mode
Counter clear
Source clock
Counter
m-2
m-1
m
m+1
m+2
n-1
n
n+1
Capture TC1DRB
? m-1 m m+1 m+2 n-1
Capture
n n+1
ACAP1 (b) Auto-capture
Figure 10-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 101
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
10.3.2 External Trigger Timer Mode
In the external trigger timer mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. For the trigger edge used to start counting, either the rising or falling edge is defined in TC1CR. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (trigger start and stop) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. If the edge opposite to trigger edge is detected before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA, the up-counter is cleared and halted without generating an interrupt request. Therefore, this mode can be used to detect exceeding the specified pulse by interrupt. After being halted, the up-counter restarts counting when the trigger edge is detected. * When TC1CR is set to "0" (trigger start) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The edge opposite to the trigger edge has no effect in count up. The trigger edge for the next counting is ignored if detecting it before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA.
Since the TC1 pin input has the noise rejection, pulses of 4/fc [s] or less are rejected as noise. A pulse width of 12/fc [s] or more is required to ensure edge detection. The rejection circuit is turned off in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode, but a pulse width of one machine cycle or more is required. Example 1 :Generating an interrupt 1 ms after the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin (fc =16 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00000100B (TC1CR), 00100100B (EIRL). 7 (TC1DRA), 007DH ; 1ms / 27/fc = 7DH ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 0
Example 2 :Generating an interrupt when the low-level pulse with 4 ms or more width is input to the TC1 pin (fc =16 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00000100B (TC1CR), 01110100B (EIRL). 7 (TC1DRA), 01F4H ; 4 ms / 27/fc = 1F4H ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 0
Page 102
TMP86FH12MG
Count start TC1 pin input
Count start
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
4
n-1 n
0
1
2
3
TC1DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC1 interrupt request
(a) Trigger start (METT1 = 0)
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
Count start TC1 pin input
Count clear
Count start
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
m-1 m
0
1
2
3
n
0
TC1DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC1 interrupt request
Note: m < n (b) Trigger start and stop (METT1 = 1)
Figure 10-3 External Trigger Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 103
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
10.3.3 Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin. Either the rising or falling edge of the input pulse is selected as the count up edge in TC1CR. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin. Since a match between the up-counter and the value set to TC1DRA is detected at the edge opposite to the selected edge, an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated after a match of the value at the edge opposite to the selected edge. Two or more machine cycles are required for the low-or high-level pulse input to the TC1 pin. Setting TC1CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB with the auto capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Timer start
TC1 pin Input Up-counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request ?
0 1 2 n-1 n 0 1 2
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
n
Match detect
Counter clear
Figure 10-4 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Table 10-2 Input Pulse Width to TC1 Pin
Minimum Pulse Width [s] NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode High-going Low-going 23/fc 23/fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 23/fs 23/fs
Page 104
TMP86FH12MG
10.3.4 Window Mode
In the window mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the pulse that is logical ANDed product of the input pulse to the TC1 pin (window pulse) and the internal source clock. Either the positive logic (count up during high-going pulse) or negative logic (count up during low-going pulse) can be selected. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. Define the window pulse to the frequency which is sufficiently lower than the internal source clock programmed with TC1CR.
Count start Timer start Count stop Count start
TC1 pin input Internal clock Counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request ? 7 Match detect (a) Positive logic (TC1S = 10)
Timer start Count start Count stop Count start
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
Counter clear
TC1 pin input Internal clock Counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request (b) Negative logic (TC1S = 11) ? 9 Match detect Counter clear 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 90 1
Figure 10-5 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 105
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
10.3.5 Pulse Width Measurement Mode
In the pulse width measurement mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. Either the rising or falling edge of the internal clock is selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR. Either the single- or double-edge capture is selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (single-edge capture) Either high- or low-level input pulse width can be measured. To measure the high-level input pulse width, set the rising edge to TC1CR. To measure the low-level input pulse width, set the falling edge to TC1CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then restarts counting when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. * When TC1CR is set to "0" (double-edge capture) The cycle starting with either the high- or low-going input pulse can be measured. To measure the cycle starting with the high-going pulse, set the rising edge to TC1CR. To measure the cycle starting with the low-going pulse, set the falling edge to TC1CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request. The up-counter continues counting up, and captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting.
Note 1: The captured value must be read from TC1DRB until the next trigger edge is detected. If not read, the captured value becomes a don't care. It is recommended to use a 16-bit access instruction to read the captured value from TC1DRB. Note 2: For the single-edge capture, the counter after capturing the value stops at "1" until detecting the next edge. Therefore, the second captured value is "1" larger than the captured value immediately after counting starts. Note 3: The first captured value after the timer starts may be read incorrectively, therefore, ignore the first captured value.
Page 106
TMP86FH12MG
Example :Duty measurement (resolution fc/27 [Hz])
CLR LD DI SET EI LD : PINTTC1: CPL JRS LD LD LD RETI SINTTC1: LD LD LD : RETI : VINTTC1: DW PINTTC1 ; INTTC1 Interrupt vector ; Duty calculation A, (TC1DRBL) W,(TC1DRBH) (WIDTH), WA ; Stores cycle in RAM ; Reads TC1DRB (Cycle) (INTTC1SW). 0 F, SINTTC1 A, (TC1DRBL) W,(TC1DRBH) (HPULSE), WA ; Stores high-level pulse width in RAM ; Reads TC1DRB (High-level pulse width) ; INTTC1 interrupt, inverts and tests INTTC1 service switch (TC1CR), 00100110B (EIRL). 7 (INTTC1SW). 0 (TC1CR), 00000110B ; INTTC1 service switch initial setting Address set to convert INTTC1SW at each INTTC1 ; Sets the TC1 mode and source clock ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 ; IMF= "1" ; Starts TC1 with an external trigger at MCAP1 = 0
WIDTH HPULSE TC1 pin INTTC1 interrupt request INTTC1SW
Page 107
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
Count start TC1 pin input Trigger
Count start (TC1S = "10")
Internal clock Counter TC1DRB INTTC1 interrupt request
0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n 0 1 Capture n 2 3
[Application] High-or low-level pulse width measurement (a) Single-edge capture (MCAP1 = "1") Count start Count start (TC1S = "10")
TC1 pin input
Internal clock Counter TC1DRB INTTC1 interrupt request [Application] (1) Cycle/frequency measurement (2) Duty measurement (b) Double-edge capture (MCAP1 = "0")
0 1 2 3 4 n+1
n
n+1 n+2 n+3 Capture n
m-2 m-1 m 0 1 Capture m
2
Figure 10-6 Pulse Width Measurement Mode
Page 108
TMP86FH12MG
10.3.6 Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
In the programmable pulse generation (PPG) mode, an arbitrary duty pulse is generated by counting performed in the internal clock. To start the timer, TC1CR specifies either the edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin or the command start. TC1CR specifies whether a duty pulse is produced continuously or not (one-shot pulse). * When TC1CR is set to "0" (Continuous pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting and pulse generation. When TC1S is cleared to "00" during PPG output, the PPG pin retains the level immediately before the counter stops. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (One-shot pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. TC1CR is cleared to "00" automatically at this time, and the timer stops. The pulse generated by PPG retains the same level as that when the timer stops.
Since the output level of the PPG pin can be set with TC1CR when the timer starts, a positive or negative pulse can be generated. Since the inverted level of the timer F/F1 output level is output to the PPG pin, specify TC1CR to "0" to set the high level to the PPG pin, and "1" to set the low level to the PPG pin. Upon reset, the timer F/F1 is initialized to "0".
Note 1: To change TC1DRA or TC1DRB during a run of the timer, set a value sufficiently larger than the count value of the counter. Setting a value smaller than the count value of the counter during a run of the timer may generate a pulse different from that specified. Note 2: Do not change TC1CR during a run of the timer. TC1CR can be set correctly only at initialization (after reset). When the timer stops during PPG, TC1CR can not be set correctly from this point onward if the PPG output has the level which is inverted of the level when the timer starts. (Setting TC1CR specifies the timer F/F1 to the level inverted of the programmed value.) Therefore, the timer F/F1 needs to be initialized to ensure an arbitrary level of the PPG output. To initialize the timer F/F1, change TC1CR to the timer mode (it is not required to start the timer mode), and then set the PPG mode. Set TC1CR at this time. Note 3: In the PPG mode, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC1DRA > TC1DRB Note 4: Set TC1DRB after changing the mode of TC1M to the PPG mode.
Page 109
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
Example :Generating a pulse which is high-going for 800 s and low-going for 200 s (fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD (TC1CR), 10000111B (TC1DRA), 007DH (TC1DRB), 0019H (TC1CR), 10010111B ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 27/fc ms = 007DH) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 27/fc = 0019H) ; Starts the timer
Example :After stopping PPG, setting the PPG pin to a high-level to restart PPG (fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD : LD LD LD LD (TC1CR), 10000111B (TC1DRA), 007DH (TC1DRB), 0019H (TC1CR), 10010111B : (TC1CR), 10000111B (TC1CR), 10000100B (TC1CR), 00000111B (TC1CR), 00010111B ; Stops the timer ; Sets the timer mode ; Sets the PPG mode, TFF1 = 0 ; Starts the timer ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 27/fc s = 007DH) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 27/fc = 0019H) ; Starts the timer
I/O port output latch shared with PPG output Data output D R Q
Port output enable PPG pin
Function output TC1CR Write to TC1CR Internal reset Match to TC1DRB Match to TC1DRA Set Clear Toggle Timer F/F1 INTTC1 interrupt request TC1CR clear Q
Figure 10-7 PPG Output
Page 110
TMP86FH12MG
Timer start
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
TC1DRB
n
Match detect TC1DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC1 interrupt request Note: m > n (a) Continuous pulse generation (TC1S = 01)
Count start
TC1 pin input
Trigger
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
n
n+1
m
0
TC1DRB
n
TC1DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC1 interrupt request [Application] One-shot pulse output (b) One-shot pulse generation (TC1S = 10) Note: m > n
Figure 10-8 PPG Mode Timing Chart
Page 111
10. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
10.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
Page 112
TMP86FH12MG
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
11.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC4 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC4 pin TC4M TC4S TFF4
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC4S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F4
PDO4/PWM4/ PPG4 pin
TC4CK TC4CR TTREG4 PWREG4
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF4
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC3S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC3 pin TC3M TC3S TFF3
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC3 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F3
PDO3/PWM3/ pin
TC3CK TC3CR TTREG3 PWREG3
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF3
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 11-1 8-Bit TimerCouter 3, 4
Page 113
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP86FH12MG
11.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG3, PWREG3). TimerCounter 3 Timer Register
TTREG3 (0019H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG3 (0017H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG3) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 3 Control Register
TC3CR (0015H) 7 TFF3 6 5 TC3CK 4 3 TC3S 2 1 TC3M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF3
Time F/F3 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC3CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC3S TC3 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC3M TC3M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC4M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC3S= 1 0), do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings. To start the timer operation (TC3S= 0 1), TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC4CR, where TC3M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4CR and TC4CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 11-1 and Table 11-2.
Page 114
TMP86FH12MG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 113. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 115
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP86FH12MG
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG4 and PWREG4). TimerCounter 4 Timer Register
TTREG4 (001AH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG4 (0018H) R/ W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG4) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 4 Control Register
TC4CR (0016H) 7 TFF4 6 5 TC4CK 4 3 TC4S 2 1 TC4M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF4
Timer F/F4 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC4 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC4CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC4S TC4 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC4M TC4M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC4S= 1 0), do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings. To start the timer operation (TC4S= 0 1), TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC4M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC4 overflow signal regardless of the TC3CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC4M, where TC3CR must be set to 011.
Page 116
TMP86FH12MG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4S and TFF4, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 11-1 and Table 11-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 113.
Table 11-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 11-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 117
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP86FH12MG
Table 11-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 256 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 2 (PWREG4, 3) 65534 1 (PWREG4, 3) < (TTREG4, 3) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG4, 3) + 1 < (TTREG4, 3) Register Value
Note: n = 3 to 4
Page 118
TMP86FH12MG
11.3 Function
The TimerCounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 (TC3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
11.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 11-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3, 4 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Repeated Cycle
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter4, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC4CR), 00010000B (TC4CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC4. (EIRH). 5 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG4), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 119
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP86FH12MG
TC4CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG4
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 11-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 11.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
TC4CR TC4 pin input
Counter
TTREG4
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 11-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 11.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 120
TMP86FH12MG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC4 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG4), 3DH (TC4CR), 00010001B (TC4CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC4.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Page 121
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 11-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 122
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG4
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
Set F/F
PDO4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86FH12MG
TMP86FH12MG
11.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 3, 4
Table 11-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 123
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG4
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG4
PWREG4
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 11-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Page 124
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
n
p
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FH12MG
TMP86FH12MG
11.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the upper byte and lower byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 11-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC3CR), 13H :Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRH). 5 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG3), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC4CR), 04H (TC4CR), 0CH
TC4CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG3 (Lower byte) TTREG4 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 11-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 125
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP86FH12MG
11.3.6 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC3 pin. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG3), and upper byte (TTREG4) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
11.3.7 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4 logic level.) Since PWREG4 and 3 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG4 and 3 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG4 and 3. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG4 and 3. Set the lower byte (PWREG3) and upper byte (PWREG3) in this order to program PWREG4 and 3. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG4 and 3 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG4 and 3. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG4 and 3, reading data of PWREG4 and 3 is previous value until INTTC4 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG4 and 3 immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing thePWM4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 126
TMP86FH12MG
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC4CR).7 : Sets the PWM4 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM4 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 11-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2 s fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
8.2 ms 4.1 ms
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 056H (TC4CR), 05EH
Page 127
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG3
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG3
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG4
n
m
p
Write to PWREG4
Figure 11-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 128
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
an
cp
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FH12MG
TMP86FH12MG
11.3.8 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fc/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG3 TTREG4, PWREG3 PWREG4) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TTREG3), 8002H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 057H (TC4CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC4CR).7: Sets the PPG4 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 3, 4
Page 129
11.1 Configuration
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 11-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC40)
Page 130
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG3 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG4 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F4
PPG4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FH12MG
TMP86FH12MG
11.3.9 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCouter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG4 and 3 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 3, 4
11.3.9.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. Table 11-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRH). 5 (SYSCR2).6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 : Starts TC4 and 3.
CLR RETI : VINTTC4: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 131
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP86FH12MG
11.3.9.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. Table 11-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRH). 5 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC4 and 3.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC4: DW : PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 132
TMP86FH12MG
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
The TMP86FH12MG has a clocked-synchronous 8-bit serial interface. Serial interface has an 8-byte transmit and receive data buffer that can automatically and continuously transfer up to 64 bits of data. Serial interface is connected to outside peripherl devices via SO, SI, SCK port.
12.1 Configuration
SIO control / status register
SIOSR
SIOCR1
SIOCR2
CPU
Control circuit
Buffer control circuit Shift register Shift clock
Transmit and receive data buffer (8 bytes in DBR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Serial data output 8-bit transfer 4-bit transfer
SI
Serial data input
INTSIO interrupt request
Serial clock
SCK
Serial clock I/O
Figure 12-1 Serial Interface
Page 133
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.2 Control TMP86FH12MG
12.2 Control
The serial interface is controlled by SIO control registers (SIOCR1/SIOCR2). The serial interface status can be determined by reading SIO status register (SIOSR). The transmit and receive data buffer is controlled by the SIOCR2. The data buffer is assigned to address 0F80H to 0F87H for SIO in the DBR area, and can continuously transfer up to 8 words (bytes or nibbles) at one time. When the specified number of words has been transferred, a buffer empty (in the transmit mode) or a buffer full (in the receive mode or transmit/receive mode) interrupt (INTSIO) is generated. When the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 8-bit receive mode and the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, a fixed interval wait can be applied to the serial clock for each word transferred. Four different wait times can be selected with SIOCR2. SIO Control Register 1
SIOCR1 (0031H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 4 SIOM 3 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS
Indicate transfer start / stop
0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 010:
Stop Start Continuously transfer Abort transfer (Automatically cleared after abort) 8-bit transmit mode 4-bit transmit mode 8-bit transmit / receive mode 8-bit receive mode 4-bit receive mode Write only
SIOINH
Continue / abort transfer
SIOM
Transfer mode select
100: 101: 110:
Except the above: Reserved NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 SCK Serial clock select 010 011 100 101 110 111 fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 Reserved External clock ( Input from SCK pin ) SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/25 Write only
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Set SIOS to "0" and SIOINH to "1" when setting the transfer mode or serial clock. Note 3: SIOCR1 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Control Register 2
SIOCR2 (0032H) 7 6 5 4 WAIT 3 2 1 BUF 0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
Page 134
TMP86FH12MG
Always sets "00" except 8-bit transmit / receive mode. 00: WAIT Wait control 01: 10: 11: 000: 001: 010: BUF Number of transfer words (Buffer address in use) 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: Tf = TD(Non wait) Tf = 2TD(Wait) Tf = 4TD(Wait) Tf = 8TD (Wait) 1 word transfer 2 words transfer 3 words transfer 4 words transfer 5 words transfer 6 words transfer 7 words transfer 8 words transfer 0F80H 0F80H ~ 0F81H 0F80H ~ 0F82H 0F80H ~ 0F83H 0F80H ~ 0F84H 0F80H ~ 0F85H 0F80H ~ 0F86H 0F80H ~ 0F87H Write only
Note 1: The lower 4 bits of each buffer are used during 4-bit transfers. Zeros (0) are stored to the upper 4bits when receiving. Note 2: Transmitting starts at the lowest address. Received data are also stored starting from the lowest address to the highest address. ( The first buffer address transmitted is 0F80H ). Note 3: The value to be loaded to BUF is held after transfer is completed. Note 4: SIOCR2 must be set when the serial interface is stopped (SIOF = 0). Note 5: *: Don't care Note 6: SIOCR2 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Status Register
SIOSR (0032H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 4 3 2 1 0
SIOF SEF
Serial transfer operating status monitor Shift operating status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Transfer terminated Transfer in process Shift operation terminated Shift operation in process
Read only
Note 1: Tf; Frame time, TD; Data transfer time Note 2: After SIOS is cleared to "0", SIOF is cleared to "0" at the termination of transfer or the setting of SIOINH to "1".
(output)
SCK output
TD Tf
Figure 12-2 Frame time (Tf) and Data transfer time (TD)
12.3 Serial clock
12.3.1 Clock source
Internal clock or external clock for the source clock is selected by SIOCR1.
Page 135
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.3 Serial clock TMP86FH12MG
12.3.1.1 Internal clock
Any of six frequencies can be selected. The serial clock is output to the outside on the SCK pin. The SCK pin goes high when transfer starts. When data writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode or the transmit/receive mode) cannot keep up with the serial clock rate, there is a wait function that automatically stops the serial clock and holds the next shift operation until the read/write processing is completed. Table 12-1 Serial Clock Rate
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Clock fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External Baud Rate 1.91 Kbps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External Clock fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External DV7CK = 1 Baud Rate 1024 bps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode Clock fs/25 External Baud Rate 1024 bps External
Note: 1 Kbit = 1024 bit (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Automatically wait function
SCK
pin (output)
SO
pin (output) Written transmit data a
a0
a1
a2
a3 b
b0
b1 c
b2
b3
c0
c1
Figure 12-3 Automatic Wait Function (at 4-bit transmit mode)
12.3.1.2 External clock
An external clock connected to the SCK pin is used as the serial clock. In this case, output latch of this port should be set to "1". To ensure shifting, a pulse width of at least 4 machine cycles is required. This pulse is needed for the shift operation to execute certainly. Actually, there is necessary processing time for interrupting, writing, and reading. The minimum pulse is determined by setting the mode and the program. Therfore, maximum transfer frequency will be 488.3K bit/sec (at fc=16MHz).
SCK
pin (Output)
tSCKL tSCKH
tcyc = 4/fc (In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) 4/fs (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes) tSCKL, tSCKH > 4tcyc
Figure 12-4 External clock pulse width
Page 136
TMP86FH12MG
12.3.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit, and the trailing edge is used to receive.
12.3.2.1 Leading edge
Transmitted data are shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK pin input/ output).
12.3.2.2 Trailing edge
Received data are shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK pin input/output).
SCK pin
SO pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
3210
*321
**32
***3
(a) Leading edge
SCK pin
SI pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
****
0***
10**
210*
3210
*; Don't care
(b) Trailing edge
Figure 12-5 Shift edge
12.4 Number of bits to transfer
Either 4-bit or 8-bit serial transfer can be selected. When 4-bit serial transfer is selected, only the lower 4 bits of the transmit/receive data buffer register are used. The upper 4 bits are cleared to "0" when receiving. The data is transferred in sequence starting at the least significant bit (LSB).
12.5 Number of words to transfer
Up to 8 words consisting of 4 bits of data (4-bit serial transfer) or 8 bits (8-bit serial transfer) of data can be transferred continuously. The number of words to be transferred can be selected by SIOCR2. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the specified number of words has been transferred. If the number of words is to be changed during transfer, the serial interface must be stopped before making the change. The number of words can be changed during automatic-wait operation of an internal clock. In this case, the serial interface is not required to be stopped.
Page 137
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FH12MG
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
INTSIO interrupt
(a) 1 word transmit
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(b) 3 words transmit
SCK pin
SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(c) 3 words receive
Figure 12-6 Number of words to transfer (Example: 1word = 4bit)
12.6 Transfer Mode
SIOCR1 is used to select the transmit, receive, or transmit/receive mode.
12.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes
In these modes, firstly set the SIO control register to the transmit mode, and then write first transmit data (number of transfer words to be transferred) to the data buffer registers (DBR). After the data are written, the transmission is started by setting SIOCR1 to "1". The data are then output sequentially to the SO pin in synchronous with the serial clock, starting with the least significant bit (LSB). As soon as the LSB has been output, the data are transferred from the data buffer register to the shift register. When the final data bit has been transferred and the data buffer register is empty, an INTSIO (Buffer empty) interrupt is generated to request the next transmitted data. When the internal clock is used, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated if the next transmitted data are not loaded to the data buffer register by the time the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transmitted. Writing even one word of data cancels the automatic-wait; therefore, when transmitting two or more words, always write the next word before transmission of the previous word is completed.
Note:Automatic waits are also canceled by writing to a DBR not being used as a transmit data buffer register; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications. For example, when 3 words are transmitted, do not use the DBR of the remained 5 words.
When an external clock is used, the data must be written to the data buffer register before shifting next data. Thus, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay time from the generation of the interrupt request to writing of the data to the data buffer register by the interrupt service program. The transmission is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer empty interrupt service program. Page 138
TMP86FH12MG
SIOCR1 is cleared, the operation will end after all bits of words are transmitted. That the transmission has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR because SIOSR is cleared to "0" when a transfer is completed. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmission is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". When an external clock is used, it is also necessary to clear SIOCR1 to "0" before shifting the next data; If SIOCR1 is not cleared before shift out, dummy data will be transmitted and the operation will end. If it is necessary to change the number of words, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0".
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 12-7 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Input) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 12-8 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, External clock)
Page 139
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FH12MG
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
MSB of last word
tSODH = min 3.5/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 3.5/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 12-9 Transmiiied Data Hold Time at End of Transfer 12.6.2 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes
After setting the control registers to the receive mode, set SIOCR1 to "1" to enable receiving. The data are then transferred to the shift register via the SI pin in synchronous with the serial clock. When one word of data has been received, it is transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register (DBR). When the number of words specified with the SIOCR2 has been received, an INTSIO (Buffer full) interrupt is generated to request that these data be read out. The data are then read from the data buffer registers by the interrupt service program. When the internal clock is used, and the previous data are not read from the data buffer register before the next data are received, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated until the data are read. A wait will not be initiated if even one data word has been read.
Note:Waits are also canceled by reading a DBR not being used as a received data buffer register is read; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications.
When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, the previous data are read before the next data are transferred to the data buffer register. If the previous data have not been read, the next data will not be transferred to the data buffer register and the receiving of any more data will be canceled. When an external clock is used, the maximum transfer speed is determined by the delay between the time when the interrupt request is generated and when the data received have been read. The receiving is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer full interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been received. That the receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the receiving is ended. After confirmed the receiving termination, the final receiving data is read. When SIOCR1 is set, the receiving is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". (The received data is ignored, and it is not required to be read out.) If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0" then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of data receiving, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before the received data is read out.
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Page 140
TMP86FH12MG
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO Interrupt
DBR
a
Read out
b
Read out
Figure 12-10 Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock) 12.6.3 8-bit transfer / receive mode
After setting the SIO control register to the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, write the data to be transmitted first to the data buffer registers (DBR). After that, enable the transmit/receive by setting SIOCR1 to "1". When transmitting, the data are output from the SO pin at leading edges of the serial clock. When receiving, the data are input to the SI pin at the trailing edges of the serial clock. When the all receive is enabled, 8-bit data are transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transferred. Usually, read the receive data from the buffer register in the interrupt service. The data buffer register is used for both transmitting and receiving; therefore, always write the data to be transmitted after reading the all received data. When the internal clock is used, a wait is initiated until the received data are read and the next transfer data are written. A wait will not be initiated if even one transfer data word has been written. When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, it is necessary to read the received data and write the data to be transmitted next before starting the next shift operation. When an external clock is used, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay between generation of an interrupt request and the received data are read and the data to be transmitted next are written. The transmit/receive operation is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in INTSIO interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the transmitting/receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been transmitted. That the transmitting/receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the transmitting/receiving is ended. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmit/receive operation is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of transmit/receive operation, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before reading and writing of the receive/transmit data.
Page 141
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FH12MG
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (output) SO pin
a0 c0
a1 c1
a2 c2
a3 c3
a4 c4
a5 c5
a6 c6
a7 c7
b0 d0
b1 d1
b2 d2
b3 d3
b4 d4
b5 d5
b6 d6
b7 d7
SI pin
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write (a) Read out (c)
c
b
Write (b)
d
Read out (d)
Figure 12-11 Transfer / Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
Bit 6
Bit 7 of last word
tSODH = min 4/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 4/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 12-12 Transmitted Data Hold Time at End of Transfer / Receive
Page 142
TMP86FH12MG
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
13.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UARTCR1
Transmit data buffer
TDBUF
Receive data buffer
RDBUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD
INTTXD
INTRXD
TXD
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UARTSR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC3
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UARTCR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 13-1 UART (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 143
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
13.2 Control TMP86FH12MG
13.2 Control
UART is controlled by the UART Control Registers (UARTCR1, UARTCR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UARTSR).
UART Control Register1
UARTCR1 (0021H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC3 ( Input INTTC3) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UARTCR1 and UARTCR1 should be set to "0" before UARTCR1 is changed.
UART Control Register2
UARTCR2 (0022H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejectio time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UARTCR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UARTCR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UARTCR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 144
TMP86FH12MG
UART Status Register
UARTSR (0021H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART Receive Data Buffer
RDBUF (0F89H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART Transmit Data Buffer
TDBUF (0F89H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 145
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
13.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86FH12MG
13.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UARTCR1), and parity (Select parity in UARTCR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UARTCR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 13-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 13-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 13-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 146
TMP86FH12MG
13.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART is set of UARTCR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 13-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC3 is used as the UART transfer rate (when UARTCR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC3 source clock [Hz] / TTREG3 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
13.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UARTCR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 13-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 147
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
13.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86FH12MG
13.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UARTCR1.
13.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UARTCR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UARTCR1.
13.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
13.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UARTCR1 to "1". Read UARTSR to check UARTSR = "1", then write data in TDBUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TDBUF zero-clears UARTSR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UARTCR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UARTSR is set to "1" and an INTTXD interrupt is generated. While UARTCR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UARTCR1 to when send data are written to TDBUF, the TXD pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UARTSR, then write data in TDBUF. Otherwise, UARTSR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
13.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UARTCR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD pin, the receive data are transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UARTSR is set and an INTRXD interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RDBUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UARTCR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 148
TMP86FH12MG
13.9 Status Flag
13.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UARTSR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears PERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 13-5 Generation of Parity Error 13.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UARTSR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears FERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 13-6 Generation of Framing Error 13.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RDBUF, overrun error flag UARTSR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RDBUF are not affected. The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
Page 149
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
13.9 Status Flag TMP86FH12MG
UARTSR
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RDBUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UARTSR
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears OERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 13-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UARTSR is cleared.
13.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RDBUF sets receive data buffer full flag UARTSR to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RDBUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears RBFL.
UARTSR
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 13-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UARTSR is set during the period between reading the UARTSR and reading the RDBUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RDBUF. Therefore, after reading the RDBUF, read the UARTSR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
13.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TDBUF, UARTSR is set to "1", that is, when data in TDBUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the TDBUF is written after reading the UARTSR.
Page 150
TMP86FH12MG
Data write
TDBUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UARTSR After reading UARTSR writing TDBUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 13-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 13.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TDBUF (UARTSR = "1"), transmit end flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is stated after writing the TDBUF.
Shift register
TXD pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TDBUF
Start
Bit 0
UARTSR
UARTSR
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 13-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 151
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
13.9 Status Flag TMP86FH12MG
Page 152
TMP86FH12MG
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
The TMP86FH12MG have a 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter.
14.1 Configuration
The circuit configuration of the 10-bit AD converter is shown in Figure 14-1. It consists of control register ADCCR1 and ADCCR2, converted value register ADCDR1 and ADCDR2, a DA converter, a sample-hold circuit, a comparator, and a successive comparison circuit.
DA converter
VDD VSS
R/2 Analog input multiplexer
AIN0
R Reference voltage
R/2
Sample hold circuit
A
Y 10 Analog comparator
AIN7
n S EN IREFON 4 SAIN ADRS AINDS
Successive approximate circuit Shift clock Control circuit 2 AMD 3 ACK ADCCR2 8 ADCDR1 2 INTADC
EOCF ADBF
ADCCR1
ADCDR2
AD converter control register 1, 2
AD conversion result register 1, 2
Note: Before using AD converter, set appropriate value to I/O port register conbining a analog input port. For details, see the section on "I/O ports".
Figure 14-1 10-bit AD Converter
Page 153
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.2 Register configuration TMP86FH12MG
14.2 Register configuration
The AD converter consists of the following four registers: 1. AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) This register selects the analog channels and operation mode (Software start or repeat) in which to perform AD conversion and controls the AD converter as it starts operating. 2. AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) This register selects the AD conversion time and controls the connection of the DA converter (Ladder resistor network). 3. AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) This register used to store the digital value fter being converted by the AD converter. 4. AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) This register monitors the operating status of the AD converter. AD Converter Control Register 1
ADCCR1 (0025H) 7 ADRS 6 AMD 5 4 AINDS 3 2 SAIN 1 0 (Initial value: 0001 0000)
ADRS
AD conversion start
0: 1: 00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1: 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111:
AD conversion start AD operation disable Software start mode Reserved Repeat mode Analog input enable Analog input disable AIN0 AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 AIN4 AIN5 AIN6 AIN7 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
AMD
AD operating mode
AINDS
Analog input control
R/W
SAIN
Analog input channel select
Note 1: Select analog input channel during AD converter stops (ADCDR2 = "0"). Note 2: When the analog input channel is all use disabling, the ADCCR1 should be set to "1". Note 3: During conversion, Do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog input port use as general input port. And for port near to analog input, Do not input intense signaling of change. Note 4: The ADCCR1 is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion. Note 5: Do not set ADCCR1 newly again during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCR1 newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine). Note 6: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register1 (ADCCR1) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR1 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Page 154
TMP86FH12MG
AD Converter Control Register 2
ADCCR2 (0026H) 7 6 5 IREFON 4 "1" 3 2 ACK 1 0 "0" (Initial value: **0* 000*)
IREFON
DA converter (Ladder resistor) connection control
0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Connected only during AD conversion Always connected 39/fc Reserved 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc Reserved
ACK
AD conversion time select (Refer to the following table about the conversion time)
R/W
Note 1: Always set bit0 in ADCCR2 to "0" and set bit4 in ADCCR2 to "1". Note 2: When a read instruction for ADCCR2, bit6 to 7 in ADCCR2 read in as undefined data. Note 3: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register2 (ADCCR2) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR2 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Table 14-1 ACK setting and Conversion time
Condition ACK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Conversion time 39/fc 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 19.5 s Reserved 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Reserved 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 10 MHz 5 MHz 2.5 MHz 15.6 s
Note 1: Setting for "-" in the above table are inhibited.
fc: High Frequency oscillation clock [Hz]
Note 2: Set conversion time setting should be kept more than the following time by Power supply voltage(VDD) .
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 15.6 s and more 31.2 s and more
AD Converted value Register 1
ADCDR1 (0020H) 7 AD09 6 AD08 5 AD07 4 AD06 3 AD05 2 AD04 1 AD03 0 AD02 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
AD Converted value Register 2
ADCDR2 (001FH) 7 AD01 6 AD00 5 EOCF 4 ADBF 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
Page 155
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.2 Register configuration TMP86FH12MG
EOCF ADBF
AD conversion end flag AD conversion BUSY flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Before or during conversion Conversion completed During stop of AD conversion During AD conversion
Read only
Note 1: The ADCDR2 is cleared to "0" when reading the ADCDR1. Therfore, the AD conversion result should be read to ADCDR2 more first than ADCDR1. Note 2: The ADCDR2 is set to "1" when AD conversion starts, and cleared to "0" when AD conversion finished. It also is cleared upon entering STOP mode or SLOW mode . Note 3: If a read instruction is executed for ADCDR2, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable.
Page 156
TMP86FH12MG
14.3 Function
14.3.1 Software Start Mode
After setting ADCCR1 to "01" (software start mode), set ADCCR1 to "1". AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is thereby started. After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. ADRS is automatically cleared after AD conversion has started. Do not set ADCCR1 newly again (Restart) during AD conversion. Before setting ADRS newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine).
AD conversion start ADCCR1 AD conversion start
ADCDR2
ADCDR1 status
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
ADCDR2
INTADC interrupt request ADCDR1 Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
ADCDR2
Figure 14-2 Software Start Mode 14.3.2 Repeat Mode
AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is performed repeatedly. In this mode, AD conversion is started by setting ADCCR1 to "1" after setting ADCCR1 to "11" (Repeat mode). After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. In repeat mode, each time one AD conversion is completed, the next AD conversion is started. To stop AD conversion, set ADCCR1 to "00" (Disable mode) by writing 0s. The AD convert operation is stopped immediately. The converted value at this time is not stored in the AD converted value register.
Page 157
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
ADCCR1 AD conversion start ADCCR1
"11"
"00"
Conversion operation
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
3rd conversion result
AD convert operation suspended. Conversion result is not stored.
3rd conversion result
ADCDR1,ADCDR2
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
ADCDR2 EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
INTADC interrupt request ADCDR1 ADCDR2 Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
Conversion result read Conversion result read
Figure 14-3 Repeat Mode 14.3.3 Register Setting
1. Set up the AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) as follows: * Choose the channel to AD convert using AD input channel select (SAIN). * Specify analog input enable for analog input control (AINDS). * Specify AMD for the AD converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode). 2. Set up the AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) as follows: * Set the AD conversion time using AD conversion time (ACK). For details on how to set the conversion time, refer to Figure 14-1 and AD converter control register 2. * Choose IREFON for DA converter control. 3. After setting up (1) and (2) above, set AD conversion start (ADRS) of AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) to "1". If software start mode has been selected, AD conversion starts immediately. 4. After an elapse of the specified AD conversion time, the AD converted value is stored in AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) and the AD conversion finished flag (EOCF) of AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) is set to "1", upon which time AD conversion interrupt INTADC is generated. 5. EOCF is cleared to "0" by a read of the conversion result. However, if reconverted before a register read, although EOCF is cleared the previous conversion result is retained until the next conversion is completed.
Page 158
TMP86FH12MG
Example :After selecting the conversion time 19.5 s at 16 MHz and the analog input channel AIN3 pin, perform AD conversion once. After checking EOCF, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009EH nd store the upper 8 bits in address 0009FH in RAM. The operation mode is software start mode.
: (port setting) : LD LD : : (ADCCR1) , 00100011B (ADCCR2) , 11011000B ;Set port register approrriately before setting AD converter registers. (Refer to section I/O port in details) ; Select AIN3 ;Select conversion time(312/fc) and operation mode
SET SLOOP : TEST JRS
(ADCCR1) . 7 (ADCDR2) . 5 T, SLOOP
; ADRS = 1(AD conversion start) ; EOCF= 1 ?
LD LD LD LD
A , (ADCDR2) (9EH) , A A , (ADCDR1) (9FH), A
; Read result data
; Read result data
14.4 STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion
When standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode) is entered forcibly during AD conversion, the AD convert operation is suspended and the AD converter is initialized (ADCCR1 and ADCCR2 are initialized to initial value). Also, the conversion result is indeterminate. (Conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read the conversion results before entering standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode).) When restored from standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode), AD conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessary to restart AD conversion. Note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing into the analog reference voltage.
Page 159
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result TMP86FH12MG
14.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
The analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit digital value converted by the AD as shown in Figure 14-4.
3FFH 3FEH 3FDH AD conversion result 03H 02H 01H
VDD VSS
0
1
2
3 1021 1022 1023 1024 Analog input voltage
1024
Figure 14-4 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result (Typ.)
Page 160
TMP86FH12MG
14.6 Precautions about AD Converter
14.6.1 Analog input pin voltage range
Make sure the analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are used at voltages within VDD to VSS. If any voltage outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain. The other analog input pins also are affected by that.
14.6.2 Analog input shared pins
The analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are shared with input/output ports. When using any of the analog inputs to execute AD conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. This is necessary to prevent the accuracy of AD conversion from degrading. Not only these analog input shared pins, some other pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/output to and from adjacent pins.
14.6.3 Noise Countermeasure
The internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in Figure 14-5. The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to noise. Therefore, make sure the output impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 k or less. Toshiba also recommends attaching a capacitor external to the chip.
Internal resistance AINi Permissible signal source impedance
5 k (max) 5 k (typ)
Analog comparator
Internal capacitance
C = 15 pF (typ.)
DA converter
Note) i = 7 to 0
Figure 14-5
Analog Input Equivalent Circuit and Example of Input Pin Processing
Page 161
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.6 Precautions about AD Converter TMP86FH12MG
Page 162
TMP86FH12MG
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
In the TMP86FH12MG, the STOP mode is released by not only P20(INT5/STOP) pin but also four (STOP0 to STOP3) pins. When the STOP mode is released by STOP0 to STOP3 pins, the STOP pin needs to be used. In details, refer to the following section " 15.2 Control ".
15.1 Configuration
INT5 STOP mode release signal (1: Release) STOP
STOP0 STOP1 STOP2 STOP3
STOPCR (0F88H)
Figure 15-1 Key-on Wakeup Circuit
15.2 Control
STOP0 to STOP3 pins can controlled by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR). It can be configured as enable/disable in 1-bit unit. When those pins are used for STOP mode release, configure corresponding I/O pins to input mode by I/O port register beforehand. Key-on Wakeup Control Register
STOPCR (0F88H) 7 STOP3 6 STOP2 5 STOP1 4 STOP0 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
STOP3 STOP2 STOP1 STOP0
0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable
STOP3 STOP2 STOP1 STOP0
STOP mode released by STOP3 STOP mode released by STOP2 STOP mode released by STOP1 STOP mode released by STOP0
Write only Write only Write only Write only
15.3 Function
Stop mode can be entered by setting up the System Control Register (SYSCR1), and can be exited by detecting the "L" level on STOP0 to STOP3 pins, which are enabled by STOPCR, for releasing STOP mode (Note1).
Page 163
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
15.3 Function TMP86FH12MG
Also, each level of the STOP0 to STOP3 pins can be confirmed by reading corresponding I/O port data register, check all STOP0 to STOP3 pins "H" that is enabled by STOPCR before the STOP mode is startd (Note2).
Note 1: When the STOP mode released by the edge release mode (SYSCR1 = "0"), inhibit input from STOP0 to STOP3 pins by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) or must be set "H" level into STOP0 to STOP3 pins that are available input during STOP mode. Note 2: When the STOP pin input is high or STOP0 to STOP3 pins inputwhich is enabled by STOPCR is low, executing an instruction which starts STOP mode will not place in STOP mode but instead will immediately start the release sequence (Warm up). Note 3: STOP pin doesn't have the control register such as STOPCR, so when STOP mode is released by STOP0 to STOP3 pins, STOP pin also should be used as STOP mode release function. Note 4: In STOP mode, Key-on Wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing STOP mode) by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) may genarate the penetration current, so the said pin must be disabled AD conversion input (analog voltage input). Note 5: When the STOP mode is released by STOP0 to STOP3 pins, the level of STOP pin should hold "L" level (Figure 15-2).
a) STOP
b) In case of STOP0 to STOP3
STOP pin STOP mode Release STOP mode
STOP pin "L"
STOP0 pin
STOP mode
Release STOP mode
Figure 15-2 Priority of STOP pin and STOP0 to STOP3 pins
Table 15-1 Release level (edge) of STOP mode
Release level (edge) Pin name SYSCR1="1" (Note2) "H" level "L" level "L" level "L" level "L" level SYSCR1="0" Rising edge Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1)
STOP
STOP0 STOP1 STOP2 STOP3
Page 164
TMP86FH12MG
16. Flash Memory
TMP86FH12MG has 16384byte flash memory (address: C000H to FFFFH). The write and erase operations to the flash memory are controlled in the following three types of mode. - MCU mode The flash memory is accessed by the CPU control in the MCU mode. This mode is used for software bug correction and firmware change after shipment of the device since the write operation to the flash memory is available by retaining the application behavior. - Serial PROM mode The flash memory is accessed by the CPU control in the serial PROM mode. Use of the serial interface (UART) enables the flash memory to be controlled by the small number of pins. TMP86FH12MG in the serial PROM mode supports on-board programming which enables users to program flash memory after the microcontroller is mounted on a user board. - Parallel PROM mode The parallel PROM mode allows the flash memory to be accessed as a stand-alone flash memory by the program writer provided by the third party. High-speed access to the flash memory is available by controlling address and data signals directly. For the support of the program writer, please ask Toshiba sales representative.
In the MCU and serial PROM modes, the flash memory control register (FLSCR) is used for flash memory control. This chapter describes how to access the flash memory using the flash memory control register (FLSCR) in the MCU and serial PROM modes.
Page 165
16. Flash Memory
16.1 Flash Memory Control TMP86FH12MG
16.1 Flash Memory Control
The flash memory is controlled via the flash memory control register (FLSCR) and flash memory stanby control resister (FLSSTB). Flash Memory Control Register
FLSCR (0FFFH) 7 6 FLSMD 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value : 1100 ****)
FLSMD
Flash memory command sequence execution control
1100: Disable command sequence execution 0011: Enable command sequence execution Others: Reserved
R/W
Note 1: The command sequence of the flash memory can be executed only when FLSMD="0011B". In other cases, any attempts to execute the command sequence are ineffective. Note 2: FLSMD must be set to either "1100B" or "0011B". Note 3: Bits 3 through 0 in FLSCR are always read as don't care.
Flash Memory Standby Control Register
FLSSTB (0FE9H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FSTB (Initial value : **** ***0)
FSTB
Flash memory standby control
0: Disable the standby function. 1: Enable the standby function.
Write only
Note 1: When FSTB is set to 1, do not execute the read/write instruction to the flash memory because there is a possibility that the expected data is not read or the program is not operated correctly. If executing the read/write instruction, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically. Note 2: If an interrupt is issued when FSTB is set to 1, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically and then the vector area of the flash memory is read. Note 3: If the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode is activated when FSTB is set to 1, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically. In the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode, the standby function operates regardless of FSTB setting.
16.1.1 Flash Memory Command Sequence Execution Control (FLSCR)
The flash memory can be protected from inadvertent write due to program error or microcontroller misoperation. This write protection feature is realized by disabling flash memory command sequence execution via the flash memory control register (write protect). To enable command sequence execution, set FLSCR to "0011B". To disable command sequence execution, set FLSCR to "1100B". After reset, FLSCR is initialized to "1100B" to disable command sequence execution. Normally, FLSCR should be set to "1100B" except when the flash memory needs to be written or erased.
16.1.2 Flash Memory Standby Control (FLSSTB)
Low power consumption is enabled by cutting off the steady-state current of the flash memory. In the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode, the steady-state current of the flash memory is cut off automatically. When the program is executed in the RAM area (without accessing the flash memory) in the NORMAL 1/2 or SLOW1/2 mode, the current can be cut off by the control of the register. To cut off the steady-state current of the flash memory, set FLSSTB to "1" by the control program in the RAM area. The procedures for controlling the FLSSTB register are explained below.
(Steps1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 8 are controlled by the write control program executed in the RAM area.)
Page 166
TMP86FH12MG
1. Transfer the control program of the FLSSTB register to the RAM area. 2. Jump to the RAM area. 3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF = "0"). 4. Set FLSSTB to "1". 5. Execute the user program. 6. Repeat step 5 until the return request to the flash memory is detected. 7. Set FLSSTB to "0". 8. Jump to the flash memory area.
Note 1: The standby function is not operated by setting FLSSTB with the program in the flash memory. You must set FLSSTB by the program in the RAM area. Note 2: To use the standby function by setting FLSSTB to "1" with the program in the RAM area, FLSSTB must be set to "0" by the program in the RAM area before returning the program control to the flash memory. If the program control is returned to the flash memory with FLSSTB set to "1", the program may misoperate and run out of control.
Page 167
16. Flash Memory
16.2 Command Sequence TMP86FH12MG
16.2 Command Sequence
The command sequence in the MCU and the serial PROM modes consists of six commands (JEDEC compatible), as shown in Table 16-1. Addresses specified in the command sequence are recognized with the lower 12 bits (excluding BA, SA, and FF7FH used for read protection). The upper 4 bits are used to specify the flash memory area, Table 16-1 Command Sequence
Command Sequence 1st Bus Write Cycle Address 1 Byte program Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase) Chip Erase (All Erase) Product ID Entry Product ID Exit 5 Product ID Exit 6 Read Protect 555H 555H AAH AAH AAAH AAAH 55H 55H 555H 555H F0H A5H FF7FH 00H 555H Data AAH 2nd Bus Write Cycle Address AAAH Data 55H 3rd Bus Write Cycle Address 555H Data A0H 4th Bus Write Cycle Address BA (Note 1) 555H Data Data (Note 1) AAH 5th Bus Write Cycle Address Data 6th Bus Write Cycle Address SA (Note 2) 555H Data -
2
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
80H
AAAH
55H
30H
3 4
555H 555H XXH
AAH AAH F0H
AAAH AAAH -
55H 55H -
555H 555H -
80H 90H -
555H -
AAH -
AAAH -
55H -
10H -
Note 1: Set the address and data to be written. Note 2: The area to be erased is specified with the upper 4 bits of the address.
16.2.1 Byte Program
This command writes the flash memory for each byte unit. The addresses and data to be written are specified in the 4th bus write cycle. Each byte can be programmed in a maximum of 40 s. The next command sequence cannot be executed until the write operation is completed. To check the completion of the write operation, perform read operations repeatedly until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the write operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1).
Note:To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
16.2.2 Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase)
This command erases the flash memory in units of 4 kbytes. The flash memory area to be erased is specified by the upper 4 bits of the 6th bus write cycle address. For example, to erase 4 kbytes from F000H to FFFFH, specify one of the addresses in F000H-FFFFH as the 6th bus write cycle. The sector erase command is effective only in the MCU and serial PROM modes, and it cannot be used in the parallel PROM mode. A maximum of 30 ms is required to erase 4 kbytes. The next command sequence cannot be executed until the erase operation is completed. To check the completion of the erase operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1).
Page 168
TMP86FH12MG
16.2.3 Chip Erase (All Erase)
This command erases the entire flash memory in approximately 30 ms. The next command sequence cannot be executed until the erase operation is completed. To check the completion of the erase operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). After the chip is erased, all bytes contain FFH.
16.2.4 Product ID Entry
This command activates the Product ID mode. In the Product ID mode, the vendor ID, the flash ID, and the read protection status can be read from the flash memory. Table 16-2 Values To Be Read in the Product ID Mode
Address F000H F001H Meaning Vendor ID Flash macro ID 98H 41H 0EH: 0BH: 07H: F002H Flash size 05H: 03H: 01H: 00H: FFH: FF7FH Read protection status Other than FFH: Read protection enabled 60 kbytes 48 kbytes 32 kbytes 24 kbytes 16 kbytes 8 kbytes 4 kbytes Read protection disabled Read Value
Note: The value at address F002H (flash size) depends on the size of flash memory incorporated in each product. For example, if the product has 60-kbyte flash memory, "0EH" is read from address F002H.
16.2.5 Product ID Exit
This command is used to exit the Product ID mode.
16.2.6 Read Protect
This command enables the read protection setting in the flash memory. When the read protection is enabled, the flash memory cannot be read in the parallel PROM mode. In the serial PROM mode, the flash write and RAM loader commands cannot be executed. To disable the read protection setting, it is necessary to execute the chip erase command sequence. Whether or not the read protection is enabled can be checked by reading FF7FH in the Product ID mode. For details, see Table 16-2. It takes a maximum of 40 s to set read protection in the flash memory. The next command sequence cannot be executed until this operation is completed. To check the completion of the read protect operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the read protect operation, any attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1).
Page 169
16. Flash Memory
16.3 Toggle Bit (D6) TMP86FH12MG
16.3 Toggle Bit (D6)
After the byte program, chip erase, and read protect command sequence is executed, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 (D6) of the data (toggling between 0 and 1) until the operation is completed. Therefore, this toggle bit provides a software mechanism to check the completion of each operation. Usually perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. After the byte program, chip erase, or read protect command sequence is executed, the initial read of the toggle bit always produces a "1".
Page 170
TMP86FH12MG
16.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
When the write, erase and read protections are set in the flash memory, read and fetch operations cannot be performed in the entire flash memory area. Therefore, to perform these operations in the entire flash memory area, access to the flash memory area by the control program in the BOOTROM or RAM area. (The flash memory program cannot write to the flash memory.) The serial PROM or MCU mode is used to run the control program in the BOOTROM or RAM area.
Note 1: The flash memory can be written or read for each byte unit. Erase operations can be performed either in the entire area or in units of 4 kbytes, whereas read operations can be performed by an one transfer instruction. However, the command sequence method is adopted for write and erase operations, requiring several-byte transfer instructions for each operation. Note 2: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
16.4.1 Flash Memory Control in the Serial PROM Mode
The serial PROM mode is used to access to the flash memory by the control program provided in the BOOTROM area. Since almost of all operations relating to access to the flash memory can be controlled simply by the communication data of the serial interface (UART), these functions are transparent to the user. For the details of the serial PROM mode, see "Serial PROM Mode." To access to the flash memory by using peripheral functions in the serial PROM mode, run the RAM loader command to execute the control program in the RAM area. The procedures to execute the control program in the RAM area is shown in " 16.4.1.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode) ".
16.4.1.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode)
(Steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the BOOTROM, and steps 3 through 9 are controlled by the control program executed in the RAM area.) 1. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area in the RAM loader mode. 2. Jump to the RAM area. 3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF"0"). 4. Set FLSCR to "0011B" (to enable command sequence execution). 5. Execute the erase command sequence. 6. Read the same flash memory address twice. (Repeat step 6 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.) 7. Execute the write command sequence. 8. Read the same flash memory address twice. (Repeat step 8 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.) 9. Set FLSCR to "1100B" (to disable command sequence execution).
Note 1: Before writing to the flash memory in the RAM area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to "0". Usually disable interrupts by executing the DI instruction at the head of the write control program in the RAM area. Note 2: Since the watchdog timer is disabled by the BOOTROM in the RAM loader mode, it is not required to disable the watchdog timer by the RAM loader program.
Page 171
16. Flash Memory
16.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area TMP86FH12MG
Example :After chip erasure, the program in the RAM area writes data 3FH to address F000H.
DI LD LD LD LD (FLSCR),0011_1000B IX,0F555H IY,0FAAAH HL,0F000H : Disable interrupts (IMF"0") : Enable command sequence execution.
; #### Flash Memory Chip erase Process #### LD LD LD LD LD LD sLOOP1: LD CMP JR (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),80H (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),10H W,(IX) W,(IX) NZ,sLOOP1 : Loop until the same value is read. : 1st bus write cycle : 2nd bus write cycle : 3rd bus write cycle : 4th bus write cycle : 5th bus write cycle : 6th bus write cycle
; #### Flash Memory Write Process #### LD LD LD LD sLOOP2: LD CMP JR LD sLOOP3: JP (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),0A0H (HL),3FH W,(HL) W,(HL) NZ,sLOOP2 (FLSCR),1100_1000B sLOOP3 : Loop until the same value is read. : Disable command sequence execution. : 1st bus write cycle : 2nd bus write cycle : 3rd bus write cycle : 4th bus write cycle, (F000H)=3FH
Page 172
TMP86FH12MG
16.4.2 Flash Memory Control in the MCU mode
In the MCU mode, write operations are performed by executing the control program in the RAM area. Before execution of the control program, copy the control program into the RAM area or obtain it from the external using the communication pin. The procedures to execute the control program in the RAM area in the MCU mode are described below.
16.4.2.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the RAM area (in the MCU mode)
(Steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 11 are controlled by the control program in the RAM area.) 1. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area. 2. Jump to the RAM area. 3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF"0"). 4. Disable the watchdog timer, if it is used. 5. Set FLSCR to "0011B" (to enable command sequence execution). 6. Execute the erase command sequence. 7. Read the same flash memory address twice. (Repeat step 7 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.) 8. Execute the write command sequence. 9. Read the same flash memory address twice. (Repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.) 10. Set FLSCR to "1100B" (to disable command sequence execution). 11. Jump to the flash memory area.
Note 1: Before writing to the flash memory in the RAM area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to "0". Usually disable interrupts by executing the DI instruction at the head of the write control program in the RAM area. Note 2: When writing to the flash memory, do not intentionally use non-maskable interrupts (the watchdog timer must be disabled if it is used). If a non-maskable interrupt occurs while the flash memory is being written, unexpected data is read from the flash memory (interrupt vector), resulting in malfunction of the microcontroller.
Page 173
16. Flash Memory
16.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area TMP86FH12MG
Example :After sector erasure (E000H-EFFFH), the program in the RAM area writes data 3FH to address E000H.
DI LD LDW LD LD LD LD (WDTCR2),4EH (WDTCR1),0B101H (FLSCR),0011_1000B IX,0F555H IY,0FAAAH HL,0E000H : Disable interrupts (IMF"0") : Clear the WDT binary counter. : Disable the WDT. : Enable command sequence execution.
; #### Flash Memory Sector Erase Process #### LD LD LD LD LD LD sLOOP1: LD CMP JR (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),80H (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (HL),30H W,(IX) W,(IX) NZ,sLOOP1 : Loop until the same value is read. : 1st bus write cycle : 2nd bus write cycle : 3rd bus write cycle : 4th bus write cycle : 5th bus write cycle : 6th bus write cycle
; #### Flash Memory Write Process #### LD LD LD LD sLOOP2: LD CMP JR LD JP (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),0A0H (HL),3FH W,(HL) W,(HL) NZ,sLOOP2 (FLSCR),1100_1000B XXXXH : Loop until the same value is read. : Disable command sequence execution. : Jump to the flash memory area. : 1st bus write cycle : 2nd bus write cycle : 3rd bus write cycle : 4th bus write cycle, (1000H)=3FH
Example :This write control program reads data from address F000H and stores it to 98H in the RAM area.
LD LD A,(0F000H) (98H),A : Read data from address F000H. : Store data to address 98H.
Page 174
TMP86FH12MG
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.1 Outline
The TMP86FH12MG has a 2048 byte BOOTROM (Mask ROM) for programming to flash memory. The BOOTROM is available in the serial PROM mode, and controlled by TEST, BOOT and RESET pins. Communication is performed via UART. The serial PROM mode has seven types of operating mode: Flash memory writing, RAM loader, Flash memory SUM output, Product ID code output, Flash memory status output, Flash memory erasing and Flash memory read protection setting. Memory address mapping in the serial PROM mode differs from that in the MCU mode. Figure 17-1 shows memory address mapping in the serial PROM mode. Table 17-1 Operating Range in the Serial PROM Mode
Parameter Power supply High frequency (Note) Min 4.5 2 Max 5.5 16 Unit V MHz
Note: Though included in above operating range, some of high frequencies are not supported in the serial PROM mode. For details, refer to "Table 17-5".
17.2 Memory Mapping
The Figure 17-1 shows memory mapping in the Serial PROM mode and MCU mode. In the serial PROM mode, the BOOTROM (Mask ROM) is mapped in addresses from 7800H to 7FFFH.
0000H 0000H
SFR RAM
003FH 0040H
023FH 0F80H
64 bytes
512 bytes
SFR RAM
003FH 0040H
023FH 0F80H
64 bytes
512 bytes
DBR
0FFFH
128 bytes
DBR
0FFFH
128 bytes
7800H
BOOTROM
7FFFH
2048 bytes
C000H
C000H
Flash memory
FFFFH
16384 bytes
Flash memory
FFFFH
16384 bytes
Serial PROM mode
MCU mode
Figure 17-1 Memory Address Maps
Page 175
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting TMP86FH12MG
17.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting
17.3.1 Serial PROM Mode Control Pins
To execute on-board programming, activate the serial PROM mode. Table 17-2 shows pin setting to activate the serial PROM mode. Table 17-2 Serial PROM Mode Setting
Pin TEST pin BOOT/RXD pin
RESET pin
Setting High High
Note: The BOOT pin is shared with the UART communication pin (RXD pin) in the serial PROM mode. This pin is used as UART communication pin after activating serial PROM mode
17.3.2 Pin Function
In the serial PROM mode, TXD (P00) and RXD (P01) are used as a serial interface pin. Table 17-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode
Pin Name (Serial PROM Mode) TXD BOOT/RXD
RESET
Input/ Output Output Input/Input Input Input Power supply Power supply Serial data output
Function P00 (Note 1) P01
Pin Name (MCU Mode)
Serial PROM mode control/Serial data input Serial PROM mode control Fixed to high 4.5 to 5.5 V
RESET
TEST VDD
TEST
VSS
0V These ports are in the high-impedance state in the serial PROM mode. The input level is fixed to the port inputs with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current. (The port inputs are invalid.) To make the port inputs valid, set the pin of the SPCR register to "1" by the RAM loader control program. Self-oscillate with an oscillator. (Note 2)
I/O ports except P00, P01
I/O
XIN XOUT
Input Output
Note 1: During on-board programming with other parts mounted on a user board, be careful no to affect these communication control pins. Note 2: Operating range of high frequency in serial PROM mode is 2 MHz to 16 MHz.
Page 176
TMP86FH12MG
TMP86FH12MG
VDD(4.5 V to 5.5 V) VDD
Serial PROM mode TEST MCU mode
XIN pull-up
BOOT / RXD (P01) TXD (P00)
XOUT VSS GND
External control
RESET
Figure 17-2 Serial PROM Mode Pin Setting
Note 1: For connection of other pins, refer to " Table 17-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode ".
17.3.3 Example Connection for On-Board Writing
Figure 17-3 shows an example connection to perform on-board wring.
VDD(4.5 V to 5.5 V) VDD Serial PROM mode TEST MCU mode Pull-up Level converter (Note 2) Other parts (Note 1) RESET XIN XOUT VSS GND RC power-on reset circuit RESET control
BOOT / RXD (P01) TXD (P00)
PC control
Application board
External control board
Figure 17-3 Example Connection for On-Board Writing
Note 1: When other parts on the application board effect the UART communication in the serial PROM mode, isolate these pins by a jumper or switch. Note 2: When the reset control circuit on the application board effects activation of the serial PROM mode, isolate the pin by a jumper or switch. Note 3: For connection of other pins, refer to " Table 17-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode ".
Page 177
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting TMP86FH12MG
17.3.4 Activating the Serial PROM Mode
The following is a procedure to activate the serial PROM mode. " Figure 17-4 Serial PROM Mode Timing " shows a serial PROM mode timing. 1. Supply power to the VDD pin. 2. Set the RESET pin to low. 3. Set the TEST pin and BOOT/RXD pins to high. 4. Wait until the power supply and clock oscillation stabilize. 5. Set the RESET pin to high. 6. Input the matching data (5AH) to the BOOT/RXD pin after setup sequence. For details of the setup timing, refer to " 17.16 UART Timing ".
VDD
TEST(Input)
RESET(Input)
PROGRAM
don't care
Reset mode
Serial PROM mode
BOOT/RXD (Input)
High level setting
Setup time for serial PROM mode (Rxsup) Matching data input
Figure 17-4 Serial PROM Mode Timing
Page 178
TMP86FH12MG
17.4 Interface Specifications for UART
The following shows the UART communication format used in the serial PROM mode. To perform on-board programming, the communication format of the write controller must also be set in the same manner. The default baud rate is 9600 bps regardless of operating frequency of the microcontroller. The baud rate can be modified by transmitting the baud rate modification data shown in Table 1-4 to TMP86FH12MG. The Table 17-5 shows an operating frequency and baud rate. The frequencies which are not described in Table 17-5 can not be used. - Baud rate (Default): 9600 bps - Data length: 8 bits - Parity addition: None - Stop bit: 1 bit Table 17-4 Baud Rate Modification Data
Baud rate modification data Baud rate (bps) 04H 76800 05H 62500 06H 57600 07H 38400 0AH 31250 18H 19200 28H 9600
Page 179
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.4 Interface Specifications for UART TMP86FH12MG
Table 17-5 Operating Frequency and Baud Rate in the Serial PROM Mode
Reference Baud Rate (bps) (Note 3) Baud Rate Modification Data Ref. Frequency (MHz) 1 2 2 4 4.19 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 12 8 12.288 12.5 9 10 14.7456 16 Rating (MHz) 1.91 to 2.10 3.82 to 4.19 3.82 to 4.19 4.70 to 5.16 4.70 to 5.16 5.87 to 6.45 5.87 to 6.45 7.05 to 7.74 7.64 to 8.39 9.40 to 10.32 9.40 to 10.32 11.75 to 12.90 11.75 to 12.90 11.75 to 12.90 14.10 to 15.48 15.27 to 16.77 76800 04H Baud rate (bps) 76800 78125 76923 62500 05H 57600 06H 38400 07H 31250 0AH 19200 18H 9600 28H
(%) 0.00 +1.73 +0.16
(bps) -
(%) -
(bps) 57600 57692 59077 60096 57600 -
(%) 0.00 +0.16 +2.56 +4.33 0.00 -
(bps) 38400 39063 38462 38400 39063 38400 38462
(%) 0.00 +1.73 +0.16 0.00 +1.73 0.00 +0.16
(bps) 31250 32734 31250 31250 32000 30048 31250
(%) 0.00 +4.75 0.00 0.00 +2.40 -3.85 0.00
(bps) 19231 20144 19200 19531 19200 19231 19200 19531 18750 19200 19531 19200 19231
(%) +0.16 +4.92 0.00 +1.73 0.00 +0.16 0.00 +1.73 -2.34 0.00 +1.73 0.00 +0.16
(bps) 9615 9615 10072 9600 9766 9375 9600 9600 9615 9600 9766 9375 9600 9766 9600 9615
(%) +0.16 +0.16 +4.92 0.00 +1.73 -2.34 0.00 0.00 +0.16 0.00 +1.73 -2.34 0.00 +1.73 0.00 +0.16
3
4 5 6 7
62500 60096 62500
0.00 -3.85 0.00
Note 1: "Ref. Frequency" and "Rating" show frequencies available in the serial PROM mode. Though the frequency is supported in the serial PROM mode, the serial PROM mode may not be activated correctly due to the frequency difference in the external controller (such as personal computer) and oscillator, and load capacitance of communication pins. Note 2: It is recommended that the total frequency difference is within 3% so that auto detection is performed correctly by the reference frequency. Note 3: The external controller must transmit the matching data (5AH) repeatedly till the auto detection of baud rate is performed. This number indicates the number of times the matching data is transmitted for each frequency.
Page 180
TMP86FH12MG
17.5 Operation Command
The eight commands shown in Table 17-6 are used in the serial PROM mode. After reset release, the TMP86FH12MG waits for the matching data (5AH). Table 17-6 Operation Command in the Serial PROM Mode
Command Data 5AH F0H 30H 60H 90H C0H C3H FAH Setup Flash memory erasing Flash memory writing RAM loader Flash memory SUM output Product ID code output Flash memory status output Flash memory read protection setting Operating Mode Description Matching data. Execute this command after releasing the reset. Erases the flash memory area (address C000H to FFFFH). Writes to the flash memory area (address C000H to FFFFH). Writes to the specified RAM area (address 0050H to 023FH). Outputs the 2-byte checksum upper byte and lower byte in this order for the entire area of the flash memory (address C000H to FFFFH). Outputs the product ID code (13-byte data). Outputs the status code (7-byte data) such as the read protection condition. Enables the read protection.
17.6 Operation Mode
The serial PROM mode has seven types of modes, that are (1) Flash memory erasing, (2) Flash memory writing, (3) RAM loader, (4) Flash memory SUM output, (5) Product ID code output, (6) Flash memory status output and (7) Flash memory read protection setting modes. Description of each mode is shown below. 1. Flash memory erasing mode The flash memory is erased by the chip erase (erasing an entire flash area) or sector erase (erasing sectors in 4-kbyte units). The erased area is filled with FFH. When the read protection is enabled, the sector erase in the flash erasing mode can not be performed. To disable the read protection, perform the chip erase. Before erasing the flash memory, TMP86FH12MG checks the passwords except a blank product. If the password is not matched, the flash memory erasing mode is not activated. 2. Flash memory writing mode Data is written to the specified flash memory address for each byte unit. The external controller must transmit the write data in the Intel Hex format (Binary). If no error is encountered till the end record, TMP86FH12MG calculates the checksum for the entire flash memory area (C000H to FFFFH), and returns the obtained result to the external controller. When the read protection is enabled, the flash memory writing mode is not activated. In this case, perform the chip erase command beforehand in the flash memory erasing mode. Before activating the flash memory writing mode, TMP86FH12MG checks the password except a blank product. If the password is not matched, flash memory writing mode is not activated. 3. RAM loader mode The RAM loader transfers the data in Intel Hex format sent from the external controller to the internal RAM. When the transfer is completed normally, the RAM loader calculates the checksum. After transmitting the results, the RAM loader jumps to the RAM address specified with the first data record in order to execute the user program. When the read protection is enabled, the RAM loader mode is not activated. In this case, perform the chip erase beforehand in the flash memory erasing mode. Before activating the RAM loader mode, TMP86FH12MG checks the password except a blank product. If the password is not matched, flash RAM loader mode is not activated. 4. Flash memory SUM output mode The checksum is calculated for the entire flash memory area (C000H to FFFFH), and the result is returned to the external controller. Since the BOOTROM does not support the operation command to read the flash memory, use this checksum to identify programs when managing revisions of application programs. 5. Product ID code output The code used to identify the product is output. The code to be output consists of 13-byte data, which includes the information indicating the area of the ROM incorporated in the product. The external controller reads this code, and recognizes the product to write. (In the case of TMP86FH12MG, the addresses from C000H to FFFFH become the ROM area.) Page 181
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.6 Operation Mode TMP86FH12MG
6. Flash memory status output mode The status of the area from FFE0H to FFFFH, and the read protection condition are output as 7-byte code. The external controller reads this code to recognize the flash memory status. 7. Flash memory read protection setting mode This mode disables reading the flash memory data in parallel PROM mode. In the serial PROM mode, the flash memory writing and RAM loader modes are disabled. To disable the flash memory read protection, perform the chip erase in the flash memory erasing mode.
Page 182
TMP86FH12MG
17.6.1 Flash Memory Erasing Mode (Operating command: F0H)
Table 17-7 shows the flash memory erasing mode. Table 17-7 Flash Memory Erasing Mode
Transfer Byte 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from the External Controller to TMP86FH12MG Matching data (5AH) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FH12MG to the External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: No data transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (F0H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Checksum (Upper byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Checksum (Lower byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted -
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate change data (Table 17-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (F0H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte
Password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
9th byte 10th byte
Password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
BOOT ROM
11th byte 12th byte
Password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
13th byte 14th byte
Password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
15th byte : m'th byte
Password string (Note 4, 5) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
n'th - 2 byte n'th - 1 byte
Erase area specification (Note 2) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
n'th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
n'th + 1 byte
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of xxh. Note 2: Refer to " 17.13 Specifying the Erasure Area ". Note 3: Refer to " 17.8 Checksum (SUM) ". Note 4: Refer to " 17.10 Passwords ". Note 5: Do not transmit the password string for a blank product. Note 6: When a password error occurs, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode. Note 7: If an error occurs during transfer of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Description of the flash memory erasing mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. Page 183
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.6 Operation Mode TMP86FH12MG
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory erasing mode (F0H). 3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 17-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, F0H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63H). 4. The 7th thorough m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. In the case of a blank product, do not transmit a password string. (Do not transmit a dummy password string.) 5. The n'th - 2 byte contains the erasure area specification data. The upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits specify the start address and end address of the erasure area, respectively. For the detailed description, see "1.13 Specifying the Erasure Area". 6. The n'th - 1 byte and n'th byte contain the upper and lower bytes of the checksum, respectively. For how to calculate the checksum, refer to "1.8 Checksum (SUM)". Checksum is calculated unless a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 7. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 184
TMP86FH12MG
17.6.2 Flash Memory Writing Mode (Operation command: 30H)
Table 17-8 shows flash memory writing mode process. Table 17-8 Flash Memory Writing Mode Process
Transfer Byte 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH12MG Matching data (5Ah) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FH12MG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (30H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted Modified baud rate Modified baud rate OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted -
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 17-4) Operation command data (30H) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte
Password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
9th byte 10th byte
Password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
BOOT ROM
11th byte 12th byte
Password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
13th byte 14th byte
Password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
15th byte : m'th byte
Password string (Note 5) -
Modified baud rate
m'th + 1 byte : n'th - 2 byte n'th - 1 byte
Intel Hex format (binary) (Note 2)
n'th byte
-
Modified baud rate
n'th + 1 byte
(Wait state for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 17.7 Error Code ". Note 2: Refer to " 17.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) ". Note 3: Refer to " 17.8 Checksum (SUM) ". Note 4: Refer to " 17.10 Passwords ". Note 5: If addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the passwords are not compared because the device is considered as a blank product. Transmitting a password string is not required. Even in the case of a blank product , it is required to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. Transmit these data from the external controller. If a password error occurs due to incorrect password count storage address or password comparison start address, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode. Note 6: If the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt confition. In this case, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode. Note 7: If an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Page 185
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.6 Operation Mode TMP86FH12MG
Description of the flash memory writing mode 1. The 1st byte of the received data contains the matching data. When the serial PROM mode is activated, TMP86FH12MG (hereafter called device), waits to receive the matching data (5AH). Upon reception of the matching data, the device automatically adjusts the UART's initial baud rate to 9600 bps. 2. When receiving the matching data (5AH), the device transmits an echo back data (5AH) as the second byte data to the external controller. If the device can not recognize the matching data, it does not transmit the echo back data and waits for the matching data again with automatic baud rate adjustment. Therefore, the external controller should transmit the matching data repeatedly till the device transmits an echo back data. The transmission repetition count varies depending on the frequency of device. For details, refer to Table 17-5. 3. The 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud rate modification data. The five types of baud rate modification data shown in Table 17-4 are available. Even if baud rate is not modified, the external controller should transmit the initial baud rate data (28H: 9600 bps). 4. Only when the 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud rate modification data corresponding to the device's operating frequency, the device echoes back data the value which is the same data in the 4th byte position of the received data. After the echo back data is transmitted, baud rate modification becomes effective. If the 3rd byte of the received data does not contain the baud rate modification data, the device enters the halts condition after sending 3 bytes of baud rate modification error code (62H). 5. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data (30H) to write the flash memory. 6. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, 30H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63H). 7. The 7th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password count storage address. When the data received with the 7th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 8. The 9th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password count storage address. When the data received with the 9th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 9. The 11th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password comparison start address. When the data received with the 11th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 10. The 13th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password comparison start address. When the data received with the 13th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 11. The 15th through m'th bytes contain the password data. The number of passwords becomes the data (N) stored in the password count storage address. The external password data is compared with Nbyte data from the address specified by the password comparison start address. The external controller should send N-byte password data to the device. If the passwords do not match, the device enters the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller. If the addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the passwords are not conpared because the device is considered as a blank product. 12. The m'th + 1 through n'th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the Intel Hex format. No received data is echoed back to the external controller. After receiving the start mark (3AH for ":") in the Intel Hex format, the device starts data record reception. Therefore, the received data except 3AH is ignored until the start mark is received. After receiving the start mark, the device receives the data record, that consists of data length, address, record type, write data and checksum. Since the device starts checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external controller should wait for the checksum after sending the end record. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller. 13. The n'th - 1 and n'th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. For details on how to calculate the SUM, refer to " 17.8 Checksum (SUM) ". The checksum is calculated only when the end record is detected and no receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end Page 186
TMP86FH12MG
record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 14. After transmitting the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Note 1: Do not write only the address from FFE0H to FFFFH when all flash memory data is the same. If only these area are written, the subsequent operation can not be executed due to password error. Note 2: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
Page 187
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.6 Operation Mode TMP86FH12MG
17.6.3 RAM Loader Mode (Operation Command: 60H)
Table 17-9 shows RAM loader mode process. Table 17-9 RAM Loader Mode Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH12MG Matching data (5AH) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FH12MG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (60H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 17-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (60H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte
Password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
9th byte 10th byte BOOT ROM
Password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
11th byte 12th byte
Password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
13th byte 14th byte
Password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
15th byte : m'th byte
Password string (Note 5) -
Modified baud rate
m'th + 1 byte : n'th - 2 byte n'th - 1 byte
Intel Hex format (Binary) (Note 2)
n'th byte
-
Modified baud rate
RAM
-
The program jumps to the start address of RAM in which the first transferred data is written.
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 17.7 Error Code ". Note 2: Refer to " 17.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) ". Note 3: Refer to " 17.8 Checksum (SUM) ". Note 4: Refer to " 17.10 Passwords ". Note 5: If addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the passwords are not compared because the device is considered as a blank product. Transmitting a password string is not required. Even in the case of a blank product , it is required to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. Transmit these data from the external controller. If a password error occurs due to incorrect password count storage address or password comparison start address, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode. Note 6: After transmitting a password string, the external controller must not transmit only an end record. If receiving an end record after a password string, the device may not operate correctly. Note 7: If the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Page 188
TMP86FH12MG
Note 8: If an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Description of RAM loader mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contains the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. In the 5th byte of the received data contains the RAM loader command data (60H). 3. When th 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position (in this case, 60H). If the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 7th through m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 5. The m'th + 1 through n'th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the Intel Hex format. No received data is echoed back to the external controller. After receiving the start mark (3AH for ":") in the Intel Hex format, the device starts data record reception. Therefore, the received data except 3AH is ignored until the start mark is received. After receiving the start mark, the device receives the data record, that consists of data length, address, record type, write data and checksum. The writing data of the data record is written into RAM specified by address. Since the device starts checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external controller should wait for the checksum after sending the end record. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller. 6. The n'th - 1 and n'th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. For details on how to calculate the SUM, refer to " 17.8 Checksum (SUM) ". The checksum is calculated only when the end record is detected and no receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 7. After transmitting the checksum to the external controller, the boot program jumps to the RAM address that is specified by the first received data record.
Note 1: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
Page 189
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.6 Operation Mode TMP86FH12MG
17.6.4 Flash Memory SUM Output Mode (Operation Command: 90H)
Table 17-10 shows flash memory SUM output mode process. Table 17-10 Flash Memory SUM Output Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH12MG Matching data (5AH) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FH12MG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (90H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 2) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 2) Error: Nothing transmitted -
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 17-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
BOOT ROM
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (90H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte
-
Modified baud rate
8th byte
-
Modified baud rate
9th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 17.7 Error Code ". Note 2: Refer to " 17.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Description of the flash memory SUM output mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contains the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory SUM output mode (90H). 3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, 90H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 7th and the 8th bytes contain the upper and lower bits of the checksum, respectively. For how to calculate the checksum, refer to " 17.8 Checksum (SUM) ". 5. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 190
TMP86FH12MG
17.6.5 Product ID Code Output Mode (Operation Command: C0H)
Table 17-11 shows product ID code output mode process. Table 17-11 Product ID Code Output Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH12MG Matching data (5AH) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FH12MG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (C0H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) 3AH 0AH 02H 1DH 00H 00H 00H 01H C0H Start mark The number of transfer data (from 9th to 18th bytes) Length of address (2 bytes) Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data ROM block count (1 block) First address of ROM (Upper byte) First address of ROM (Lower byte) End address of ROM (Upper byte) End address of ROM (Lower byte) Checksum of transferred data (9th through 18th byte)
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 17-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (C0H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte BOOT ROM 11th byte 12th byte 13th byte 14th byte 15th byte
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
16th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
17th byte
Modified baud rate
FFH
18th byte
Modified baud rate
FFH
19th byte (Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
22H
20th byte
Modified baud rate
-
Note: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 17.7 Error Code ".
Description of Product ID code output mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the product ID code output mode command data (C0H). 3. When the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in Table 17-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, C0H). If the 5th byte data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 9th through 19th bytes contain the product ID code. For details, refer to " 17.11 Product ID Code ". Page 191
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.6 Operation Mode TMP86FH12MG
5. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 192
TMP86FH12MG
17.6.6 Flash Memory Status Output Mode (Operation Command: C3H)
Table 17-12 shows Flash memory status output mode process. Table 17-12 Flash Memory Status Output Mode Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH12MG Matching data (5AH) Baud Rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Transfer Data from TMP86FH12MG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (C3H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) 3AH 04H Start mark Byte count (from 9th to 12th byte) Status code 1
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 17-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (C3H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte BOOT ROM
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
9th byte
Modified baud rate
00H to 03H 00H 00H 00H
10th byte 11th byte 12th byte 13th byte
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data
Checksum 2's complement for the sum of 9th through 12th bytes 9th byte Checksum 00H: 00H 01H: FFH 02H: FEH 03H: FDH -
14th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 17.7 Error Code ". Note 2: For the details on status code 1, refer to " 17.12 Flash Memory Status Code ".
Description of Flash memory status output mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the Flash memory writing mode. 2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the flash memory status output mode command data (C3H). 3. When the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in Table 17-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, C3H). If the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 9th through 13th bytes contain the status code. For details on the status code, refer to " 17.12 Flash Memory Status Code ". 5. After sending the status code, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 193
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.6 Operation Mode TMP86FH12MG
17.6.7 Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode (Operation Command: FAH)
Table 17-13 shows Flash memory read protection setting mode process. Table 17-13 Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FH12MG Matching data (5AH) Baud Rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Transfer Data from TMP86FH12MG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (FAH) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: FBH (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted -
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 17-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (FAH) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte
Password count storage address 15 to 08 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
BOOT ROM
9th byte 10th byte
Password count storage address 07 to 00 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
11th byte 12th byte
Password comparison start address 15 to 08 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
13th byte 14th byte
Password comparison start address 07 to 00 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
15th byte : m'th byte
Password string (Note 2) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
n'th byte
-
Modified baud rate
n'+1th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 17.7 Error Code ". Note 2: Refer to " 17.10 Passwords ". Note 3: If the read protection is enabled for a blank product or a password error occurs for a non-blank product, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. In this case, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode. Note 4: If an error occurs during reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. In this case, initialize TMP86FH12MG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Description of the Flash memory read protection setting mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the Flash memory writing mode. 2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory status output mode (FAH). 3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in Page 194
TMP86FH12MG
this case, FAH). If the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 7th through m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 5. The n'th byte contains the status to be transmitted to the external controller in the case of the successful read protection.
Page 195
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.7 Error Code TMP86FH12MG
17.7 Error Code
When detecting an error, the device transmits the error code to the external controller, as shown in Table 17-14. Table 17-14 Error Code
Transmit Data 62H, 62H, 62H 63H, 63H, 63H A1H, A1H, A1H A3H, A3H, A3H Meaning of Error Data Baud rate modification error. Operation command error. Framing error in the received data. Overrun error in the received data.
Note: If a password error occurs, TMP86FH12MG does not transmit an error code.
17.8 Checksum (SUM)
17.8.1 Calculation Method
The checksum (SUM) is calculated with the sum of all bytes, and the obtained result is returned as a word. The data is read for each byte unit and the calculated result is returned as a word. Example:
A1H B2H C3H D4H
If the data to be calculated consists of the four bytes, the checksum of the data is as shown below. A1H + B2H + C3H + D4H = 02EAH SUM (HIGH)= 02H SUM (LOW)= EAH
The checksum which is transmitted by executing the flash memory write command, RAM loader command, or flash memory SUM output command is calculated in the manner, as shown above.
Page 196
TMP86FH12MG
17.8.2 Calculation data
The data used to calculate the checksum is listed in Table 17-15.
Table 17-15 Checksum Calculation Data
Operating Mode Flash memory writing mode Flash memory SUM output mode Data in the entire area of the flash memory Calculation Data Description Even when a part of the flash memory is written, the checksum of the entire flash memory area (C000H to FFFH) is calculated. The data length, address, record type and checksum in Intel Hex format are not included in the checksum. The length of data, address, record type and checksum in Intel Hex format are not included in the checksum. For details, refer to " 17.11 Product ID Code ". For details, refer to " 17.12 Flash Memory Status Code " When the sector erase is executed, only the erased area is used to calculate the checksum. In the case of the chip erase, an entire area of the flash memory is used.
RAM loader mode Product ID Code Output mode Flash Memory Status Output mode
RAM data written in the first received RAM address through the last received RAM address 9th through 18th bytes of the transferred data 9th through 12th bytes of the transferred data All data in the erased area of the flash memory (the whole or part of the flash memory)
Flash Memory Erasing mode
Page 197
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) TMP86FH12MG
17.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary)
1. After receiving the checksum of a data record, the device waits for the start mark (3AH ":") of the next data record. After receiving the checksum of a data record, the device ignores the data except 3AH transmitted by the external controller. 2. After transmitting the checksum of end record, the external controller must transmit nothing, and wait for the 2-byte receive data (upper and lower bytes of the checksum). 3. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller. The Intel Hex format error occurs in the following case: When the record type is not 00H, 01H, or 02H When a checksum error occurs When the data length of an extended record (record type = 02H) is not 02H When the device receives the data record after receiving an extended record (record type = 02H) with extended address of 1000H or larger. When the data length of the end record (record type = 01H) is not 00H
17.10Passwords
The consecutive eight or more-byte data in the flash memory area can be specified to the password. TMP86FH12MG compares the data string specified to the password with the password string transmitted from the external controller. The area in which passwords can be specified is located at addresses C000H to FF9FH. The area from FFA0H to FFFFH can not be specified as the passwords area. If addresses from FFE0H through FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the passwords are not compared because the product is considered as a blank product. Even in this case, the password count storage addresses and password comparison start address must be specified. Table 17-16 shows the password setting in the blank product and nonblank product. Table 17-16 Password Setting in the Blank Product and Non-Blank Product
Password PNSA (Password count storage address) PCSA (Password comparison start address) N (Password count) Password string setting Blank Product (Note 1) C000H PNSA FF9FH C000H PCSA FF9FH Non-Blank Product C000H PNSA FF9FH
C000H PCSA FFA0 - N
* Not required (Note 5)
8N Required (Note 2)
Note 1: When addresses from FFE0H through FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the product is recognized as a blank product. Note 2: The data including the same consecutive data (three or more bytes) can not be used as a password. (This causes a password error data. TMP86FH12MG transmits no data and enters the halt condition.) Note 3: *: Don't care. Note 4: When the above condition is not met, a password error occurs. If a password error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning the error code. Note 5: In the flash memory writing mode or RAM loader mode, the blank product receives the Intel Hex format data immediately after receiving PCSA without receiving password strings. In this case, the subsequent processing is performed correctly because the blank product ignores the data except the start mark (3AH ":") as the Intel Hex format data, even if the external controller transmits the dummy password string. However, if the dummy password string contains "3AH", it is detected as the start mark erroneously. The microcontroller enters the halt mode. If this causes the problem, do not transmit the dummy password strings. Note 6: In the flash memory erasing mode, the external controller must not transmit the password string for the blank product.
Page 198
TMP86FH12MG
UART
RXD pin
F0H 12H F1H 07H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H PNSA PCSA Password string
08H
Flash memory
F012H
08H "08H" becomes the umber of Compare passwords
F107H F108H F109H F10AH F10BH Example PNSA = F012H PCSA = F107H Password string = 01H,02H,03H,04H,05H 06H,07H,08H F10CH F10DH F10EH
01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H
8 bytes
Figure 17-5 Password Comparison 17.10.1Password String
The password string transmitted from the external controller is compared with the specified data in the flash memory. When the password string is not matched to the data in the flash memory, the device enters the halt condition due to the password error.
17.10.2Handling of Password Error
If a password error occurs, the device enters the halt condition. In this case, reset the device to reactivate the serial PROM mode.
17.10.3Password Management during Program Development
If a program is modified many times in the development stage, confusion may arise as to the password. Therefore, it is recommended to use a fixed password in the program development stage. Example :Specify PNSA to F000H, and the password string to 8 bytes from address F001H (PCSA becomes F001H.)
Password Section code abs = 0F000H DB DB 08H "CODE1234" : PNSA definition : Password string definition
Page 199
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.11 Product ID Code TMP86FH12MG
17.11Product ID Code
The product ID code is the 13-byte data containing the start address and the end address of ROM. Table 17-17 shows the product ID code format. Table 17-17 Product ID Code Format
Data 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th Description Start Mark (3AH) The number of transfer data (10 bytes from 3rd to 12th byte) Address length (2 bytes) Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data ROM block count The first address of ROM (Upper byte) The first address of ROM (Lower byte) The end address of ROM (Upper byte) The end address of ROM (Lower byte) Checksum of the transferred data (2's compliment for the sum of 3rd through 12th bytes) In the Case of TMP86FH12MG 3AH 0AH 02H 1DH 00H 00H 00H 01H C0H 00H FFH FFH 22H
17.12Flash Memory Status Code
The flash memory status code is the 7-byte data including the read protection status and the status of the data from FFE0H to FFFFH. Table 17-18 shows the flash memory status code. Table 17-18 Flash Memory Status Code
Data 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Description Start mark Transferred data count (3rd through 6th byte) Status code Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data 3rd byte 00H 01H 02H 03H In the Case of TMP86FH12MG 3AH 04H 00H to 03H (See figure below) 00H 00H 00H checksum 00H FFH FEH FDH
7th
Checksum of the transferred data (2's compliment for the sum of 3rd through 6th data)
Status Code 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RPENA 0 BLANK (Initial Value: 0000 00**)
Page 200
TMP86FH12MG
RPENA BLANK
Flash memory read protection status The status from FFE0H to FFFFH.
0: 1: 0: 1:
Read protection is disabled. Read protection is enabled. All data is FFH in the area from FFE0H to FFFFH. The value except FFH is included in the area from FFE0H to FFFFH.
Some operation commands are limited by the flash memory status code 1. If the read protection is enabled, flash memory writing mode command and RAM loader mode command can not be executed. Erase all flash memory before executing these command.
Flash Memory Erasing Mode Chip Erase m Pass m Pass x x Sector Erase
RPENA
BLANK
Flash Memory Writing Mode
RAM Loader Mode
Flash memory SUM Output Mode
Product ID Code Output Mode
Flash Memory Status Output Mode
Read Protection Setting Mode
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
m Pass x x
m Pass x x
m m m m
m m m m
m m m m
x Pass x Pass
Note: m: The command can be executed. Pass: The command can be executed with a password. x: The command can not be executed. (After echoing the command back to the external controller, TMP86FH12MG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition.)
Page 201
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.13 Specifying the Erasure Area TMP86FH12MG
17.13Specifying the Erasure Area
In the flash memory erasing mode, the erasure area of the flash memory is specified by n-2 byte data. The start address of an erasure area is specified by ERASTA, and the end address is specified by ERAEND. If ERASTA is equal to or smaller than ERAEND, the sector erase (erasure in 4 kbyte units) is executed. Executing the sector erase while the read protection is enabled results in an infinite loop. If ERASTA is larger than ERAEND, the chip erase (erasure of an entire flash memory area) is executed and the read protection is disabled. Therefore, execute the chip erase (not sector erase) to disable the read protection. Erasure Area Specification Data (n-2 byte data)
7 6 ERASTA 5 4 3 2 ERAEND 1 0
ERASTA
The start address of the erasure area
0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111:
from 0000H from 1000H from 2000H from 3000H from 4000H from 5000H from 6000H from 7000H from 8000H from 9000H from A000H from B000H from C000H from D000H from E000H from F000H to 0FFFH to 1FFFH to 2FFFH to 3FFFH to 4FFFH to 5FFFH to 6FFFH to 7FFFH to 8FFFH to 9FFFH to AFFFH to BFFFH to CFFFH to DFFFH to EFFFH to FFFFH
ERAEND
The end address of the erasure area
Note: When the sector erase is executed for the area containing no flash cell, TMP86FH12MG stops the UART communication and enters the halt condition.
17.14Port Input Control Register
In the serial PROM mode, the input level is fixed to the all ports except P00 and P01 ports with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current to unused ports. (All port inputs and peripheral function inputs shared with the ports become invalid.) Therefore, to access to the flash memory in the RAM loader mode without UART communication, port inputs must be valid. To make port inputs valid, set the pin of the port input control register (SPCR) to "1". The SPCR register is not operated in the MCU mode.
Page 202
TMP86FH12MG
Port Input Control Register
SPCR (0FEAH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIN (Initial value: **** ***0)
PIN
Port input control in the serial PROM mode
0 : Invalid port inputs (The input level is fixed with a hardware feature.) 1 : Valid port inputs
R/W
Note 1: The SPCR register can be read or written only in the serial PROM mode. When the write instruction is executed to the SPCR register in the MCU mode, the port input control can not be performed. When the read instruction is executed for the SPCR register in the MCU mode, read data of bit7 to 1 are unstable. Note 2: All I/O ports except P00 and P01 ports are controlled by the SPCR register.
Page 203
17.15 Flowchart
17. Serial PROM Mode
START
17.15Flowchart
Modify the baud rate based on the receive data
Setup
Receive UART data
Receive UART data
Receive data = 5AH
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = 60H) Transmit UART data (Transmit data = C0H) Transmit UART data (Transmit data = FAH) Transmit UART data (Transmit data = C3H) Transmit UART data (Transmit data = F0H)
No
Receive data = 30H (Flash memory writing mode) Receive data = 60H (RAM loader mode) Receive data = FAH (Read protection setting mode)
Receive data = 90H (Flash memory sum output mode) Receive data = C0H (Product ID code output mode) Receive data = C3H (Flash memory status output mode) Receive data = F0H (Flash memory erasing mode)
Adjust the baud rate (Adjust the source clock to 9600 bps)
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = 30H)
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = 90H)
Yes Read protection check Protection disabled
Blank product check Blank product check
Read protection check Protection Enable
Blank product check
Read protection check
Blank product check
Protection disabled
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = 5AH)
Protection Enable
Blank product
Non-blank product
Blank product check
NG
Verify the password (Compare the receive data and flash memory data)
Receive UART data
NG NG
Page 204
Blank Non-blank product product Non-blank product Blank product
Verify the password (Compare the receive data and flash memory data) Verify the password (Compare the receive data and flash memory data)
Blank Non-blank product product
OK
Infinite loop
NG
Transmit UART data (Echo back the baud rate modification data)
Verify the password (Compare the receive data and flash memory data)
Receive UART data
Infinite loop Upper 4 bits < Lower 4 bits Receive data
Infinite loop OK OK
Infinite loop
OK
Receive UART data (Intel Hex format) RAM write process
Receive UART data (Intel Hex format)
Read protection setting
Upper 4 bits > Lower 4 bits
Read protection check Protection disabled Protection enabled
Flash memory write process
Chip erase (Erase on entire area) Transmit UART data (Checksum) Disable read protection
Sector erase (Block erase) Upper 4 bits x 1000H to Lower 4 bits x 1000H
Infinite loop
Transmit UART data
Jump to the start address of RAM program
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of an entire area)
(Checksum of an entire area)
Transmit UART data (Product ID code)
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = FBH)
Transmit UART data (Status of the read protection and blank product)
Transmit UART data (Checksum of an entire area)
Transmit UART data (Checksum of the erased area)
TMP86FH12MG
TMP86FH12MG
17.16UART Timing
Table 17-19 UART Timing-1 (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, fc = 2 to 16 MHz, Topr = -10 to 40C)
Minimum Required Time Parameter Time from matching data reception to the echo back Time from baud rate modification data reception to the echo back Time from operation command reception to the echo back Checksum calculation time Erasure time of an entire flash memory Erasure time for a sector of a flash memory (in 4-kbyte units) Symbol CMeb1 CMeb2 CMeb3 CKsm CEall CEsec Clock Frequency (fc) At fc = 2 MHz Approx. 930 Approx. 980 Approx. 800 Approx. 7864500 465 s 490 s 400 s 3.93 s 30 ms 15 ms At fc = 16 MHz 58.1 s 61.3 s 50 s 491.5 s 30 ms 15 ms
Table 17-20 UART Timing-2 (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, fc = 2 to 16 MHz, Topr = -10 to 40C)
Minimum Required Time Parameter Time from the reset release to the acceptance of start bit of RXD pin Matching data transmission interval Time from the echo back of matching data to the acceptance of baud rate modification data Time from the echo back of baud rate modification data to the acceptance of an operation command Time from the echo back of operation command to the acceptance of password count storage addresses (Upper byte) Symbol RXsup CMtr1 CMtr2 Clock Frequency (fc) At fc = 2 MHz 2100 28500 380 1.05 ms 14.2 ms 190 s At fc = 16 MHz 131.3 ms 1.78 ms 23.8 s
CMtr3
650
325 s
40.6 s
CMtr4
800
400 s
50 s
RXsup RESET pin (5AH) RXD pin (5AH) TXD pin CMeb1 (5AH) RXD pin TXD pin CMtr1
CMtr2
CMtr3
CMtr4
(28H)
(30H)
(28H)
(30H)
CMeb2 (5AH) (5AH)
CMeb3
Page 205
17. Serial PROM Mode
17.16 UART Timing TMP86FH12MG
Page 206
TMP86FH12MG
18. Input/Output Circuit
18.1 Control pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP86FH12MG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Osc.enable
fc VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (high frequency) Rf = 1.2 M (typ.) RO =0.5 k (typ.)
VDD
XIN XOUT Input Output
Rf
XIN
XOUT
Osc.enable
XTEN fs VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (Low frequency) Rf = 6 M (typ.) RO = 220 k (typ.)
XTIN XTOUT
Input Output
VDD
Rf
XTIN
XTOUT VDD R RIN
Hysteresis input Pull-up resistor RIN = 220 k (typ.) R = 100 (typ.)
RESET
Input
Address-trap-reset Watchdog-timer-reset System-clock-reset
VDD R
TEST
Input
R = 100 (typ.)
Page 207
18. Input/Output Circuit
18.2 Input/Output Ports TMP86FH12MG
18.2 Input/Output Ports
Port I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Initial "High-Z" Pch control Data output
P0 I/O
VDD
Sink open drain output or Tri-state output Hysteresis input High current output R = 100 (typ.)
Input from output latch Disable Pin input R
"
" VDD
Tri-state I/O R = 100 (typ.)
P1
I/O
R
Initial "High-Z"
VDD
Sink open drain output Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
P2
I/O
Data output Input from output latch Pin input
R
Initial "High-Z" Analog input Data output
P3 I/O
VDD
Tri-state I/O Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
Input from output latch Disable Pin input R
Page 208
TMP86FH12MG
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The absolute maximum ratings are rated values, which must not be exceeded during operation, even for an instant. Any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. If any absolute maximum rating is exceeded, a device may break down or its performance may be degraded, causing it to catch fire or explode resulting in injury to the user. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that no absolute maximum rating value will ever be exceeded.
(VSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply Voltage Input Voltage Output Voltage Symbol VDD VIN1 VOUT IOUT1 Output Current (Per 1 pin) IOUT2 IOUT2 IOUT1 Output Current (Total) IOUT2 IOUT3 Power Dissipation [Topr = 85C] Soldering Temperature (Time) Storage Temperature Operating Temperature PD Tsld Tstg Topr P0, P1, P3 ports P1, P2, P3 ports P0 ports P0, P1, P3 ports P1, P2, P3 ports P0 ports Pins Rating -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VDD+0.3 -0.3 to VDD+0.3 -1.8 3.2 30 -30 60 80 145 260 (10 s) -55 to 125 -40 to 85 C mW mA V Unit
19.2 Recommended Operating Condition
The recommended operating conditions for a device are operating conditions under which it can be guaranteed that the device will operate as specified. If the device is used under operating conditions other than the recommended operating conditions (supply voltage, operating temperature range, specified AC/DC values etc.), malfunction may occur. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that the recommended operating conditions for the device are always adhered to.
19.2.1 MCU Mode (Flash memory writing and erasing)
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40C) Parameter Supply Voltage Input high Level Symbol VDD VIH1 VIH2 VIL1 VIL2 fc Except Hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except Hysteresis input Hysteresis input XIN, XOUT Pins Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode VDD 4.5 V Min 4.5 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 0 1.0 Max 5.5 VDD VDD x 0.30 VDD x 0.25 16.0 MHz Unit
V
Input low Level Clock Frequency
VDD 4.5 V
Page 209
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.2 Recommended Operating Condition TMP86FH12MG
19.2.2 MCU Mode (Except flash memory writing and erasing)
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Pins fc = 16 MHz fc = 8 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz STOP mode VIH1 Input high Level VIH2 VIH3 VIL1 Input low Level VIL2 VIL3 fc fs XIN, XOUT XTIN, XTOUT Except Hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except Hysteresis input Hysteresis input VDD 4.5 V V < 4.5 V VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 1.0 30.0 VDDx0.70 VDDx0.75 VDDx0.90 VDDx0.30 0 VDDx0.25 VDDx0.10 8.0 16.0 34.0 MHz kHz VDD Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode IDLE0, 1, 2 mode NORMAL1, 2 mode IDLE0, 1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP0, 1, 2 mode 2.7 (Note) Min 4.5 Max Unit
Supply Voltage
VDD
5.5
V
Clock Frequency
Note: The operating temperature(Topr) must not exceed the range between -20 to 85C in under 3.0V.
19.2.3 Serial PROM Mode
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40C) Parameter Supply Voltage Input high Level Symbol VDD VIH1 VIH2 VIL1 VIL2 fc Except Hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except Hysteresis input Hysteresis input XIN, XOUT Pins Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode VDD 4.5 V Min 4.5 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 0 2.0 Max 5.5 VDD VDD x 0.30 VDD x 0.25 16.0 MHz Unit
V
Input low Level Clock Frequency
VDD 4.5 V
Page 210
TMP86FH12MG
19.3 DC Characteristics
(VSS = 0.0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Hysteresis Voltage Symbol VHS IIN1 Input Current IIN2 IIN3 Input Resistance Output leakage current Output High Voltage Output Low Voltage Output Low Current Supply Current in NORMAL1, 2 mode Supply Current in IDLE0, 1, 2 mode RIN2 ILO1 ILO2 VOH VOL IOL Pins Hysteresis input TEST Sink Open-drain, Tristate
RESET RESET Pull-Up
Condition
Min -
Typ. 0.9
Max -
Unit V
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V/0 V
-
-
2
A
100 VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V/0 V VDD = 4.5 V, IOH = -0.7 mA VDD = 4.5 V, IOL = 1.6 mA VDD = 4.5 V, VOL = 1.0 V VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3/0.2 V fc = 16 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz When a program operates on flash memory (Note5,6) When a program operates on flash memory (Note5,6) - - 4.1 - -
220 - - - - 20
450 2 2 - 0.4 -
k A
Sink open drain port Tri-state port Tri-state Port Except XOUT, P0 Port High Current Port (P0 Port)
V
-
13
20
mA
-
6.5
10
Supply Current in SLOW1 mode
-
20
65
IDD
VDD = 3.0 V VIN = 2.8 V/0.2 V fs = 32.768 kHz
When a program operates on RAM
- - -
13 5 4
25 15 12 A
Supply Current in SLEEP1 mode Supply Current in SLEEP0 mode Supply Current in STOP mode Peak current for SLOW1 mode (Note5,6) IDDP-P
VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V VDD = 5.5 V VDD = 3.0V
- - -
0.5 10 2
10 - -
mA
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25C, VDD = 5 V Note 2: Input current (IIN3); The current through pull-up or pull-down resistor is not included. Note 3: The supply current in SLOW 2 and SLEEP 2 mode are similar with the supply current in IDLE0, 1, 2 mode. Note 4: When a program is executing in the flash memory or when data is being read from the flash memory, the flash memory operates in an intermittent manner, causing peak currents in the operation current, as shown in Figure 19-1. In this case, the supply current IDD (in NORMAL1, NORMAL2 and SLOW1 modes) is defined as the sum of the average peak current and MCU current. Note 5: When designing the power supply, make sure that peak currents can be supplied. In SLOW1 mode, the difference between the peak current and the average current becomes large.
1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs) Program coutner (PC) I DDP-P
[mA]
n
n+1
n+2
n+3 Momentary flash current Sum of average momentary flash current and MCU current
Max. current Typ. current MCU current
Figure 19-1 Intermittent Operation of Flash Memory
Page 211
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.4 AD Conversion Characteristics TMP86FH12MG
19.4 AD Conversion Characteristics
(VSS = 0.0 V, 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog Input Voltage Non linearity Error Zero Point Error Full Scale Error Total Error (VSS = 0.0 V, 2.7 V VDD< 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog Input Voltage Non linearity Error Zero Point Error Full Scale Error Total Error VDD = 3.0 V VSS = 0.0 V Symbol VAIN Condition Min VSS - - - - Typ. - - - - - Max VDD 4 4 4 4 LSB Unit V VDD = 5.0 V VSS = 0.0 V Symbol VAIN Condition Min VSS - - - - Typ. - - - - - Max VDD 4 4 4 4 LSB Unit V
Note 1: The total error includes all errors except a quantization error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the ideal conversion line. Note 2: Conversion time is different in recommended value by power supply voltage. About conversion time, please refer to "10-bit AD converter (ADC)". Note 3: Please use input voltage to AIN input Pin in limit of VDD - VSS. When voltage of range outside is input, conversion value becomes unsettled and gives affect to other channel conversion value. Note 4: The operating temperature(Topr) must not exceed the range between -20 to 85C in under 3.0V.
19.5 AC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V,4.5 V VDD 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine Cycle Time tcy IDLE0, 1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP0, 1, 2 mode High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width tWCH tWCL tWSH tWSL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 16 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.25 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
31.25
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
(VSS = 0 V, 2.7 V VDD< 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine Cycle Time tcy IDLE0, 1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP0, 1, 2 mode High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width High Level Clock Pulse Width Low Level Clock Pulse Width tWCH tWCL tWSH tWSL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 4.2 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.5 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
62.5
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
Note 1: The operating temperature(Topr) must not exceed the range between -20 to 85C in under 3.0V.
Page 212
TMP86FH12MG
19.6 Flash Characteristics
Parameter Number of guaranteed writes to flash memory Condition VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40C Min - Typ. - Max 100 Unit Times
Page 213
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.7 Recommended Oscillating Conditions TMP86FH12MG
19.7 Recommended Oscillating Conditions
XIN XOUT XTIN XTOUT
C1
C2
C1
C2
(1) High-frequency Oscillation
(2) Low-frequency Oscillation
Note 1: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be mounted. Note 2: For the resonators to be used with Toshiba microcontrollers, we recommend ceramic resonators manufactured by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. For details, please visit the website of Murata at the following URL: http://www.murata.com
19.8 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shown below. 1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath Solder bath temperature = 230 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used 2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath Solder bath temperature = 245 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows: Solderability rate until forming 95 % - When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 214
TMP86FH12MG
20. Package Dimension
P-SSOP30-56-0.65
Unit: mm
Page 215
20. Package Dimension
TMP86FH12MG
Page 216
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI). Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software development. These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates. The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using. Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology. We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas. We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP86FH12MG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X